summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixdoc.tex
blob: 68d837a6ae5dd2b14e09c6ec45020deb137ebcdd (plain)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6424
6425
6426
6427
6428
6429
6430
6431
6432
6433
6434
6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6521
6522
6523
6524
6525
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6531
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6552
6553
6554
6555
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560
6561
6562
6563
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
6584
6585
6586
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6616
6617
6618
6619
6620
6621
6622
6623
6624
6625
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650
6651
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811
6812
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
7116
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7128
7129
7130
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
7137
7138
7139
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7160
7161
7162
7163
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170
7171
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225
7226
7227
7228
7229
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
7235
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7267
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7288
7289
7290
7291
7292
7293
7294
7295
7296
7297
7298
7299
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7320
7321
7322
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
7329
7330
7331
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7352
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425
7426
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7460
7461
7462
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
7519
7520
7521
7522
7523
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7542
7543
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
7619
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710
7711
7712
7713
7714
7715
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721
7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731
7732
7733
7734
7735
7736
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741
7742
7743
7744
7745
7746
7747
7748
7749
7750
7751
7752
7753
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776
7777
7778
7779
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
7800
7801
7802
7803
7804
7805
7806
7807
7808
7809
7810
7811
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
7856
7857
7858
7859
7860
7861
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7868
7869
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7928
7929
7930
7931
7932
7933
7934
7935
7936
7937
7938
7939
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7960
7961
7962
7963
7964
7965
7966
7967
7968
7969
7970
7971
7972
7973
7974
7975
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
7983
7984
7985
7986
7987
7988
7989
7990
7991
7992
7993
7994
7995
7996
7997
7998
7999
8000
8001
8002
8003
8004
8005
8006
8007
8008
8009
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
8019
8020
8021
8022
8023
8024
8025
8026
8027
8028
8029
8030
8031
8032
8033
8034
8035
8036
8037
8038
8039
8040
8041
8042
8043
8044
8045
8046
8047
8048
8049
8050
8051
8052
8053
8054
8055
8056
8057
8058
8059
8060
8061
8062
8063
8064
8065
8066
8067
8068
8069
8070
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
8078
8079
8080
8081
8082
8083
8084
8085
8086
8087
8088
8089
8090
8091
8092
8093
8094
8095
8096
8097
8098
8099
8100
8101
8102
8103
8104
8105
8106
8107
8108
8109
8110
8111
8112
8113
8114
8115
8116
8117
8118
8119
8120
8121
8122
8123
8124
8125
8126
8127
8128
8129
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8138
8139
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8148
8149
8150
8151
8152
8153
8154
8155
8156
8157
8158
8159
8160
8161
8162
8163
8164
8165
8166
8167
8168
8169
8170
8171
8172
8173
8174
8175
8176
8177
8178
8179
8180
%
%   This file is part of MusiXTeX
%
%   MusiXTeX is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
%   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
%   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
%   any later version.
%
%   MusiXTeX is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
%   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
%   GNU General Public License for more details.
%
%   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
%   along with MusiXTeX; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
%   the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
%   Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
%

\ifx\documentclass\undefined
  \documentstyle[twoside,11pt,musixdoc,multicol,backgrnd]{report}
\else
  \documentclass[twoside,11pt]{report}
  \usepackage{multicol}
  \usepackage{musixdoc}
  \usepackage{backgrnd}
%  \usepackage{amsmath}
%  \usepackage[emtex]{changebar}
\fi
\def\musictex{Music\TeX{}}

\ifx\setendvolta\undefined\def\setendvolta{\endvolta}\fi
\ifx\setendvoltabox\undefined\def\setendvoltabox{\endvoltabox}\fi

\startmuflex\makeindex

\begin{document}

%\changebarsep 10 pt
\title{\Huge\bf\musixtex\raise1.5ex\hbox{\large\copyright}\\[\bigskipamount]
\LARGE\bf Using \TeX{} to write polyphonic\\or
instrumental music\\\Large\sl Version T.104~-- \today}
\author{\Large\rm Daniel \sc Taupin\\\large\sl
 Laboratoire de Physique des Solides\\\normalsize\sl
 (associ\'e au CNRS)\\\normalsize\sl
 b\^atiment 510, Centre Universitaire, F-91405 ORSAY Cedex\\ E-mail : {\tt
taupin@lps.u-psud.fr}\\\medskip
 \\\Large\rm Ross \sc Mitchell\\\large\sl
 CSIRO Division of Atmospheric Research,\\\normalsize\sl
 Private Bag No.1, Mordialloc, Victoria 3195,\\ Australia \\\medskip
   \\\Large\rm Andreas \sc Egler\ddag\\\large\sl
   (Ruhr--Uni--Bochum)\\ Ursulastr. 32\\ D-44793 Bochum}
\date{}
%\show\maketitle
\let\endtitleORI\endtitlepage
 \def\endtitlepage{\vfill\noindent $^\ddag$ {\it For personal reasons, Andreas
Egler decided to retire from authorship of this work. Nevertherless, he has
done an important work about that, and I decided to keep his name on this
first page. {\sc D. Taupin}}\endtitleORI}
 \maketitle
\clearpage
 %\check

\thispagestyle{empty}

\null
\vfill

\begin{flushright}\it
%.. All the possible is done,\\
%the impossible is being done,\\
%for miracles I ask for some delay.\\[\smallskipamount]
%{\sc N.N.}\\[\bigskipamount]
%...~time after time~...\\[\smallskipamount]
%{\sc Cindy Lauper}\\[\bigskipamount]
 If you are not familiar with \TeX{} at all\\
I would recommend to find another software\\
package to do musical typesetting.\\
Setting up \TeX{} and \musixtex\\
on your machine and mastering it\\
is an awesome job which gobbles up\\
a lot of your time and disk space.\\[\medskipamount]
But, once you master it...\\[\smallskipamount]
{\sc Hans Kuykens}
\end{flushright}

\begin{center}
 Although one of the authors contested that point once the common work had
begun, \musixtex{} may be freely copied, duplicated and used in conformance to
the GNU General Public License (Version 2, 1991, see included file {\tt
copying})\footnote{Thanks to Free Software Foundation for advising us. See
{\tt http://www.gnu.org}}.

You may take it or parts of it to include in other packages, but no packages
called \musixtex{} without specific suffix may be distributed under the name
\musixtex{} if different from the original distribution (except obvious bug
corrections).

 Adaptations for specific implementations (e.g. fonts) should be provided as
separate additional TeX or LaTeX files which override original definition.

 \end{center}

\clearpage

\setcounter{page}1
\tableofcontents
\setcounter{secnumdepth}3
\pagestyle{headings}

\chapter{What is \musixtex{} ?}

\hrule\smallskip
\section*{Preface}

\noindent Dear user,

This is still an imperfect version, which means that some features will be
added or corrected. However our intent is to avoid removing existing commands,
in order to spare your own adaptation problems or your typing time correcting
scores you already have in your archive.


Sections marked with a star, or paragraphs marked ``???'' or ``.!.'', indicate
either  that text is partly missing, or that something might change at a
next release.

 \smallskip
 \noindent{\bf Remarque, Bemerkung, Cuidado, etc.:} If you have problems
understanding technical musical terms in english, please look at:

\begin{center} ftp://ftp.gmd.de/music/lists/glossary/glossary.ps \end{center}
which gives the translation of most terms into French, German, Dutch, Danish
and Swedish. This file {\tt glossary.eps.gz} is also included in the
distribution.
\index{glossary}\index{glossaire}\index{lexique}\index{traduction}\index{dictionnaire}

 \smallskip\hrule\medskip

 \musixtex\ is a set of \TeX\ macros to typeset polyphonic, orchestral or
polyphonic music. Therefore, it is mainly supposed to be used to type wide
scores -- just because true musicians seldom like to have to frequently turn
pages -- and this is not really compatible with \LaTeX's standard page
formats. Even with \verb|A4.sty|, the \verb|\textheight| and \verb|\textwidth|
are too small for musician needs.


However, a \LaTeX\ style has also been provided (and it is used for the
typing of the present paper) but this \verb|musixtex| style is fit for
musicographic books rather than for normal scores to be actually played.

 It should be emphasized that \musixtex\ is not intended to be a
compiler which would translate some \ixem{standard musical
notation}s into \TeX\, nor to decide by itself about aesthetic problems in music typing.
\musixtex\ only typesets staves, notes, chords, beams, slurs and ornaments as
requested by the composer. Since it makes very few typesetting decisions,
\musixtex\ appears to be a versatile and rather powerful tool. However, due
to the important amount of information to be provided to the typesetting
process, coding \musixtex\ might appear to be as awfully complicated as
the real keyboard or orchestral music. It should therefore be interfaced by
some pre-compiler in the case of the composer/typesetter wanting aesthetic
decisions to be automatically made by somebody (or something) else.
%
%\footnote{A short description to all known compilers for \musixtex\ can be
%found on page \pageref{compiler}f.}.

\section{\musixtex\ principal features}
 %\check
 \subsection{Music typesetting is two-dimensional} Most people who have just
learned a bit of music at college, probably think that music is a linear
sequence of symbols, similar to literary texts to be \TeX-ed. On the contrary,
with the exception of strictly monodic instruments like most orchestral wind
instruments and solo voices, one should be aware that
reading music is actually a matricial operation: the non-soloist musician
successively reads \ital{columns} of simultaneous notes which he
plays if he is a pianist, clavichordist or organist, which he reads
and watches if he
conducts an orchestra, and which he is supposed to check and partially play
when he is a soloist who wants to play in time with the accompanying
instrument or choir.

 In fact, our personal experience of playing piano and organ as well as
sometimes helping as an alternate Kapellmeister leads us to think that music
reading and composing is actually a slightly more complicated intellectual
process: music reading, music composing and music thinking seem to be a three
layer process. The musician usually reads or thinks several consecutive notes
(typically a long \ital{beat} or a group of logically connected notes), then
he goes down to the next instrument or voice and finally assembles the whole
to build a sequence of music lasting roughly a few seconds.  He then proceeds
to the next \ital{beat} or \ital{bar} of his score.

 Thus, it appears that the humanly logical way of coding music consists
in horizontally accumulating a set of \ital{vertical combs} with
\ital{horizontal teeth} as described in Table \ref{readtable}.
\def\hboxit#1{\boxit{\rlap{#1}\hphantom{note sequence three}}}
 \begin{table}
 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabular}{|ll|ll|}\hboxit{note sequence one}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ four}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ seven}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ ten}\\\hboxit{note sequence two}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ five}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ eight}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ eleven}\\\hboxit{note sequence three}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ six}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ nine}
  &\hboxit{note seq.\ twelve}\\
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
 \caption{The order in which a musician reads music}\label{readtable}
 \end{table}
This is the reason
why, in \musixtex\ the fundamental \ital{macro} is of the form
\begin{center}
\verb|\notes ... & ... & ... \enotes|\footnote{Also
available for \keyindex{enotes} is the abbreviation \keyindex{en}.}
\end{center}\index{\&}
\noindent where the character \verb|&| is used to separate the notes to be
typeset on respective staffs of the various instruments, starting from the
bottom.

In the case of an instrument whose score has to be written with
several staffs, these staffs are separated by the
character \|. \index{"|@{\tt\char'174}}
Thus, a score written for a keyboard instrument and
a monodic instrument (for example piano and violin)
will be coded as follows:
\begin{center}
\verb=\notes ... | ... & ...\enotes=
\end{center}
\noindent for each column of simultaneous \ital{groups of notes}.
It is worth emphasizing that we actually said \ital{``groups of notes''}:
this means that in each section of the previous macro, the music typesetter is
welcome to insert, not only chord notes to be played at once, but small
sequences of consecutive notes which build something he understands as a
musical phrase. This is why note typing macros are of two kinds in \musixtex,
namely the note macros which are not followed by spacing afterwards, and those
which induce horizontal spacing afterwards.
 \subsection{The spacing of the notes} It seems that many books have dealt
with this problem. Although it can lead to interesting algorithms, we think it
is not an important point in practice.

In fact, each column of notes has not necessarily the same spacing
and, in principle, this \itxem{spacing} should depend on the shortest
duration of the simultaneous notes. But this cannot be established as a rule,
for at least two reasons:
\begin{enumerate}
 \item spacing does not depend only on the local notes,
but also on the context, at least in the same bar.
 \item in the case of polyphonic music, exceptions can easily be found.
Here is an example:

\begin{music}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\startextract\NOtes\zhu j\ql h\hl g\hu k\ql f\enotes\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent where it can be clearly seen that the half notes at beats 2 and 3
must be spaced as if they were quarter notes since they overlap, which is
obvious only because of the presence of the indication of the
\itxem{meter} 4/4.
\end{enumerate}
So the typesetter has to take care of good readable spacings on his own.
Therefore, we preferred to provide the composer/typesetter with a
set of macros which can be found in \ref{newspacings}.
 \subsection{Music tokens, rather than a ready-made generator}
The tokens provided by \musixtex\ are:
\begin{itemize}
 \item the note symbols \ital{without stem};
 \item the note symbols \ital{with stems, and hooks for eighth notes and
shorter};
 \item the indication of beam beginnings and beam ends;
 \item the indication of beginnings and ends of ties and slurs;
 \item the indication of accidentals;
 \item the ornaments: arpeggios, trills, mordents, pinc\'es, turns, staccatos
and pizzicatos, fermatas, etc.;
 \item the bars, the meter and signature changes, etc.
\end{itemize}
 Thus, \verb|\wh a| produces an \ital{A (of nominal frequency 222.5~Hz,
unless transposed)} of duration being a
\ital{whole note}. In the same way, \verb|\wh h| produces an \ital{A
(445~Hz)} of duration represented by a \ital{whole note}, \verb|\qu c|
produces a \ital{C (250~Hz approx.)} whose value is a \ital{quarter note with
stem up}, \verb|\cl J| produces a \ital{C (125~Hz approx.)} of
duration equal to an \ital{eighth note with stem down}, etc.

 To generate quarter, eighth, sixteenth, etc. chords, the macro \keyindex{zq}
can be used: it produces a quarter note head, the vertical position of which
is memorized and recalled when another stemmed note (possibly with a hook) is
coded; then the stem is adjusted to link all simultaneous notes. Thus, the
perfect C-major chord, i.e.

\begin{music}
\startextract\NOtes\zq{ceg}\qu j\en\endextract
\end{music}
 \noindent is coded \verb|\zq c\zq e\zq g\qu j| or, in a more concise way,
\verb|\zq{ceg}\qu j| (stem up): in fact, single notes are treated\dots\ like
one-note chords.
 %\check

 \subsection{Beams}
\ital{Beams}\index{beams} are generated using macros which define their
beginning (at the current horizontal position), together with their altitude,
their direction (upper or lower), their multiplicity, their slope and their
reference number. This latter feature -- the reference number -- appears to
be necessary, since one may want to write beams whose horizontal extents
overlap: therefore, it is necessary to specify which beam the notes belong to
and which beam is terminated at a given position.
 \subsection{Setting anything on the score}
A general macro (\keyindex{zcharnote}) provides a means of
putting any sequence of symbols (in fact, some \verb|\hbox{...}|) at any
pitch of any staff of any instrument. Thus, any symbol defined in a font
(letters, math symbols, etc.) can be used to typeset music.
\section{A simple example}
 Before giving more details, we give below an example of the two first
bars of the sonata in C-major KV545 by {\sc Mozart}\index{Mozart, W.A.@{\sc
Mozart, W.A.}}:

\begin{music}
\parindent10mm
\setname1{Piano}
\setstaffs12
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\startextract
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{cge}\tbu0\qb0g|\hl j\en
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{cge}\tbu0\qb0g|\ql l\sk\ql n\en
\bar
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{dgf}|\qlp i\en
\notes\tbu0\qb0g|\ibbl1j3\qb1j\tbl1\qb1k\en
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{cge}\tbu0\qb0g|\hl j\en
\endextract
\end{music}
 The \ital{coding} is set as follows:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\parindent10mm
\instrumentnumber{1}       % a single instrument
\setname1{Piano}           % whose name is Piano
\setstaffs1{2}             % with two staffs
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}% 4/4 meter chosen
\startextract              % starting real score
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{cge}\tbu0\qb0g|\hl j\en
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{cge}\tbu0\qb0g|\ql l\sk\ql n\en
\bar
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{dgf}|\qlp i\en
\notes\tbu0\qb0g|\ibbl1j3\qb1j\tbl1\qb1k\en
\Notes\ibu0f0\qb0{cge}\tbu0\qb0g|\hl j\en
\endextract                 % terminate excerpt
\end{music}
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\begin{itemize}
 \item \verb|\ibu0f0| begins an upper beam, aligned on the
\ital{f}, reference number 0, slope 0
 \item \verb|\tbu0| terminates this beam before writing
the second \ital{g} by means of \verb|\qb0g|
 \item \verb|\qb..| indicates a note belonging to a beam.
 \item \verb|\sk| sets a space between the two quarters in the right
hand, so that the second is aligned with the third eighth of the left hand.
 \item\verb|\qlp| is a quarter with a point.
 \item\verb|\ibbl1j3| begins a double beam, aligned on the \ital{C}
(\verb|j| at this pitch) of slope 15\%.
\end{itemize}

\section{The three pass system}
\TeX's line-breaking procedure implicitly assumes
that a normal line of text will contain many words, so that inter-word
glue need not stretch or shrink too much to justify the line.
This strategy does not work very well for music. If each bar of music
is treated as a word, in the sense that inter-bar glue is placed
at the end of each bar, then the usual result is the appearance of
unsightly gaps before each bar rule. This follows naturally from the
fact that the number of bars per line is normally many fewer
than the number of words in a line of text.

To address the above aim, a three pass system was developed.
On the first pass, information about each bar is written to
an external file, by default \verb|jobname.mx1|.
This file begins with a header listing parameters
such as line width, paragraph indentation, clef, sign and meter widths,
and the first-pass elemental spacing \keyindex{elemskip}.
Width information within the bars is classified either as ``soft'' or ``hard'':
``soft'' widths are those amenable to subsequent rescaling (e.g. a note box),
while ``hard'' widths represent unscalable material such as clef symbols,
key signatures and bar rules.\index{soft width}\index{hard width}

After the first pass, an external routine is run to
determine optimal values of the elemental spacing (\verb|\elemskip|)
for each line, so as to properly fill each line, and to lead to
the piece filling an integral number of lines. This routine was written
in FORTRAN and now converted to C rather than \TeX, the main reason
being the lack of an array
handling capability in \TeX, and the concern that if such a routine
were added to \musixtex, storage problems might be exacerbated.

The resulting routine reads in the file \verb|jobname.mx1|, and writes its
output to \verb|jobname.mx2|. The latter file contains a single entry for
each line of music in the reformatted output. The key piece of information
is the revised value of \keyindex{elemskip} for each line.

Next, the file is re-\TeX-ed. On this third pass,
the \verb|jobname.mx2| file is read in, and the information
used as described above.

To give an easy example: after pass 1 you get the following output:

\begin{music}
\hsize=100mm
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
\parindent 0pt
\setsign1{-3}
\startpiece\bigaccid
\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
\raggedstoppiece\contpiece% this is cheated, the problem was to get
%                           pass 1 and pass 3 at the same time
\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
\raggedstoppiece\contpiece
\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
\setdoubleBAR\raggedstoppiece
\end{music}
After running \verb|musixflx| and \TeX-ing the second time you'll get:

\begin{music}
\hsize=100mm
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
\parindent 0pt
\generalsignature{-3}
\startpiece\bigaccid
\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
\Endpiece
\end{music}
which was coded as:
\begin{verbatim}
\hsize=100mm
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
\parindent 0pt
\generalsignature{-3}
\startpiece\bigaccid
\NOtes\qu{ce}\en\bar
\NOtes\qu{gh}\en\bar
\NOtes\qu{=b}\en
\Notes\ds\cu g\en\bar
\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\en\bar
\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\en\bar
\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\en\bar
\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
\Notes\Dqbu cf\en\bar
\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\en\bar
\NOtes\qu c\qp\en\Endpiece
\end{verbatim}
The biggest advantage of using a 3-pass system is the very easy and fast
alteration to the layout which is possible, especially of a long masterpiece,
by changing only one parameter, namely \keyindex{mulooseness}. This value
acts analogous to \TeX's \verb|\looseness| command. For non-\TeX-perts: if you
end a paragraph and state \verb|\looseness=-1| somewhere inside, then
\TeX\ will try to make this paragraph one line shorter than it normally would.

\musixtex\ does the same, but instead for paragraphs, for \ital{sections}.
What is a \ital{section}? As long as you don't force a line break, this means
the whole piece. When you force a line break with either
\keyindex{stoppiece}, \keyindex{endpiece}, \keyindex{zstoppiece},
\keyindex{Stoppiece}, \keyindex{Endpiece}, \keyindex{alaligne}
\keyindex{zalaligne}, \keyindex{alapage} or \keyindex{zalapage} you start a
new \ital{section}. Somewhere\footnote{Advisably, at the beginning or
at the end of the section, for the sake of clarity.}
before the end of the \ital{section}, you can change the value of
\keyindex{mulooseness} to something different from the default of 0.

To give an easy example, changing the last line in the previous example to:
\begin{verbatim}
\NOtes\qu c\qp\en\mulooseness=1\Endpiece
\end{verbatim}
yields:

\begin{music}
\hsize=100mm
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
\parindent 0pt
\generalsignature{-3}
\startpiece\bigaccid
\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
\mulooseness1\Endpiece
\end{music}
or:
\begin{verbatim}
\NOtes\qu c\qp\en\mulooseness=-1\Endpiece
\end{verbatim}
yields (a little bit tight, but only for the sake of
demonstration of \keyindex{mulooseness}):

\begin{music}
\hsize=100mm
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
\parindent 0pt
\generalsignature{-3}
\startpiece\bigaccid
\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
\mulooseness-1\Endpiece
\end{music}
Here is the fastest way to get a satisfactory output:
\begin{enumerate}
 \item build up the piece bar\footnote{Or two or three,
whatever you prefer.} by bar. Pay much attention to correct spacings, and go
on only when you are really satisfied with them.
 \item \TeX~$\Longrightarrow$ {\tt musixflx} $\Longrightarrow$ \TeX.
 \item Look at the output and decide if you want to have more or fewer
systems lines, e.g.~to fill the page or to get an even number of
pages.\index{musixflx@{\tt musixflx}}
 \item Adjust \keyindex{mulooseness}. However, {\large\bf beware~:}
\verb|\mulooseness| increases the target number of lines by its value. This is
of no serious trouble for large pieces, but if you say \verb|\mulooseness=3|
in a piece or in a section which only has 3 bars (three in the musical sense,
i.e. two \verb|\bar| in the text), then {\tt musixflx} will not be able to split
3 bars into 4 lines... and it will hopefully result in a diagnostic by {\tt
musixflx}, but possibly also in an arithmetic fault...
 \item Delete the \verb|jobname.mx2| and again\\
\TeX~$\Longrightarrow$ \verb|musixflx| $\Longrightarrow$ \TeX
\quad\ital{(For hackers: watch the difference in {\tt jobname.mx1}!)}
\end{enumerate}

\begin{remark}
Instead of looking at the output of the previous run and modifying the
number of systems using \keyindex{mulooseness} one can directly specify
the number of lines in a section by assigning a positive number to
\keyindex{linegoal}. Use \keyindex{linegoal} in the same way as 
\keyindex{mulooseness} somewhere in a section, preferable at start
or end. \keyindex{mulooseness} must be zero for \keyindex{linegoal} 
to work. Both are automatically set to zero after processing the end 
of a section e.g. by \keyindex{stoppiece}. \keyindex{linegoal} 
requires the latest version of musixflx (0.83).
\end{remark}

 \noindent If you have really followed this step by step, then your whole
layout will be ready and you will not have to generate \verb|jobname.mx2|
again. This only holds as long as you don't change any spacings.

If you get the warning: \verb|You can't use \raise ...|, than read the upper
paragraph again and follow the instruction of point 5.

There are some more advantages. Without using \ital{glue},
every horizontal position in a line can be computed. This enables using,
e.g.~octave lines, without specifying a dimension, but by saying
\verb|\i...| and \verb|\t...|.


 \subsection{External executable {\tt musixflx}}
One drawback affecting portability between computers is the executable
{\tt musixflx}\index{musixflx@{\tt musixflx}}. We are still searching for
people who are able to compile the C-source and maintain it.

On most computers, the executable is invoked by typing the name of the program
and the name of the file to be acted upon. \ital{i.e.}

\verb|musixflx jobname.mx1|

Optionally, you can add a letter to indicate one of the debug modes, which are:
\begin{quote}
\verb|d | for debug information to screen\\
\verb|f | for debug information to file \verb|jobname.mxl|\\
\verb|s | to get the computed lines immediately on screen
\end{quote}
To allow for ease of use with a batch file, \verb|musixflx| can either be fed
with \verb|jobname.mx1|, \verb|jobname.tex| or only
\verb|jobname|, all of which opens \verb|jobname.mx1|.

 \medskip For large scores (more than 4 pages approximately), having
only one section and an overall value of \verb|\mulooseness| becomes
impractical since one wants not only to have nicely spaced systems, but one
also usually wants to have completely filled pages to avoid empty top and
bottom margins on the last page. It is then wise to force the total number of
pages and maybe the line breaks in each page, which can be done by either using
explicit \keyindex{alapage} and \keyindex{alaligne}, or more automatically by
means of the \keyindex{autolines} command borrowed from \musictex\ and
implemented in the additional {\ttxem{musixcpt.tex}} file.
 \subsection{Restrictions and warnings} If you have worked with \musictex\
before, you must be aware that two main things have changed, namely the
spacing (and spacing commands) and the line breaking, see section~\ref{spacing},
p.~\pageref{spacing} and section~\ref{linebreak} p.~\pageref{linebreak}.

 %\check
 A serious practical problem concerns the effect of unrecorded spaces, such as
those created by source lines not ended by \verb|%| \index{%@{\tt\char37}} or
\keyindex{relax} or another control sequence ending in a letter. These will
result in the dreadful {\bf Overfull hbox} messages appearing during pass 3.

\medskip
\centerline{\boxit{Considerable discipline is needed to avoid this problem!}}

When you start using this software package, you will spend a lot of time
searching for the cause of over/underfull-hbox warnings, which will appear during
pass 3. You may ignore them during pass 1,
but \ital{you must} find their cause when they
appear during pass 3.

In \musixtex\ there is no glue (only $\pm$ 1pt behind \verb|\writesignatures|),
so it works only if every space is recorded in the correct way. As a result,
never use
\verb|\hskip| or \verb|\kern| with the exception of \ital{zero}-boxes, like
\verb|\rlap|, \verb|\llap|, \verb|\zcharnote|, \verb|\uptext|, etc., or
(apparently) fixed length boxes like \verb|\hsong|. But that is not all---all
spacing commands\footnote{Except {\Bslash hardspace} which is an exception and has
the opposite purpose.} must be fed with scalable values
(\ital{e.g.} \verb|\noteskip|, \verb|\elemskip|, \verb|\afterruleskip| and
\verb|\beforeruleskip|, optionally preceded by an integer or decimal number).

\verb|musixflx| can't work if the values of \verb|\noteskip|,
\verb|\afterruleskip|, \verb|\beforeruleskip|, are directly assigned
``hard''\footnote{Hard values are all values  which are not scalable}
values in between
\verb|\startpiece| and \verb|\stoppiece|\footnote{{\Bslash endpiece} has the
same meaning}.\index{hard spacing}

These restrictions make it hardly compatible with most sources designed for
\musictex\footnote{Most examples provided by D. {\sc Taupin} in
\musictex's distribution can be run with \musixtex\ without serious
problems... However, they will eventually have to be corrected for the sake of
compatibility.}. Most of them have to be adjusted to get things going.

Some values are much more important than in \musictex,
namely \verb|\elemskip|, \verb|\afterruleskip| and \verb|\beforeruleskip|.
The ratio between them is especially very important if you use
\keyindex{mulooseness} often to adjust the number of lines:
all of them are multiplied by the same factor in each section.
 %\check
 \subsection{\musixtex's laws}
\begin{enumerate}
 \item Never have a line that doesn't finish either with a control sequence
or with a \verb|%|
inside of \verb|\startpiece...\stoppiece|

\begin{center}
\Large\bf  !!! \musixtex\ forgives NOTHING !!!
\end{center}
   (a space in the default font (using plain-\TeX) causes 3.33pt of unrecorded space,
     but there is only $\pm$ 1pt of glue in \musixtex)
 \item \verb|\off| must be used with relative values, like
  \verb|\noteskip|, \verb|\elemskip|, \verb|\after[before]ruleskip|
 \item \verb|\qsk| and \verb|\hqsk| are now scalable, e.g. \verb|\qsk|
  doesn't mean exactly one note head width (it depends on \verb|\elemskip|
   and \verb|flex_factor|)
 \item Text of songs and any non-\musixtex\ text must be put in zero boxes, like
  \verb|\zcharnote|, \verb|zchar|, \verb|rlap|, \verb|lrlap|, \verb|llap|,
\verb|uptext|, \verb|zsong...|. However, specific features are now provided,
namely \verb|\hardlyrics| and \verb|\hsong| (see \ref{lyrics},
p.~\pageref{lyrics}).
 \item Don't touch either \verb|\noteskip| with hard values,
  or \verb|\after[before]ruleskip| at all inside of
  \verb|\startpiece (\debutmorceau) ... \stop[end]piece (\susp[fin]morceau)|
\end{enumerate}
\section{Some highlights}
 %\check
 \subsection{Signatures}
Signatures can be stated either for all instruments, for example by
\keyindex{generalsignature}\verb|{-2}| which sets two flats on each staff, or
separately for each instrument.

Thus, the \keyindex{generalsignature}
can be partly overridden by
\keyindex{setsign}\verb|2{1}| which puts one
sharp on the staffs of \itxem{instrument number} 2. Of course, the
current signature may change at any time as well as the meters and clefs.
 \subsection{Transposition}
 An important question is: \ital{``can \musixtex\ transpose a score~?''}.
The answer is now 99.5~\% \ital{yes}. If fact, there is an internal register
named \keyindex{transpose} the default value of which is zero, but it may be
set to any reasonable positive or negative value. In that case, it offsets all
symbols pitched with letter symbols by that number of pitch steps. However,
it will neither change the signature nor the local accidentals, and if -- for
example -- you transpose a piece written in $C$ by 1 pitch, \musixtex\ will
not know whether you want it in $D\flat$, in $D$ or in $D\sharp$. This might
become tricky if accidentals occur within the piece, which might have to be
converted into flats, naturals, sharps or double sharps, depending on the new
chosen signature. To avoid this trouble, \ital{relative} accidentals
have been implemented, the actual output of which depends on the pitch of
this accidental and on the current signature.\index{relative accidentals}
 %\check
 \subsection{Selecting special instrument scores}
Another question is: \ital{``can I write an orchestral score and extract the
separate scores for individual instruments~?''} The answer is 95~\%
\ital{yes}: in fact, you can define your own macros
\verb|\mynotes...\enotes|, \verb|\myNotes...\enotes| with as many
arguments as there are in the orchestral score (hopefully this
is less than, or equal to
9, but \TeX perts know how to work around) and change its definition
depending on the selected instrument (or insert a test dependent
on the value of some
selection register). But the limitation is that the numbering of instruments
may change, so that \verb|\setsign3| may have to become \verb|\setsign1| if
instrument 3 is alone. But, in turn, this is not a serious problem for
average \TeX\ wizard apprentices.
 %\check
 \subsection{Variable staff and note sizes}
 Although the standard staff size is 20pt, \musixtex\ allows scores of 16pt
and 24pt staff sizes. In addition, any instrument may have a special staff
size (usually smaller than the overall staff size) and special commands
\verb|\smallnotesize| or \verb|\tinynotesize| enable notes (and also beams or
accidentals) to be of a smaller size, in order to quote optional notes or
\ital{cadenzas}.
 %\check
\section{How to get it}
Primary site is {\tt hprib.lps.u-psud.fr} (anonymous {\tt ftp}); say:

 \verb|cd pub/musixtex|

 \verb|mget musix*.tex| (to get the macros)

 \verb|cd /pub/musixtex/mf|

 \verb|mget *.mf| (to get the source of the fonts)

 \verb|cd /pub/musixtex/tfm|

 \verb|binary|

 \verb|mget *.tfm| (to get the font metrics)

\noindent or:

 \verb|cd /pub/music\_zips|

 \verb|binary|

 \verb|mget musix*.zip| (to get the zipped packages specific to \musixtex)
 
\medskip\noindent Official mirrors are
the CTAN servers. To get it you have tou say:

 \verb|cd ctan| (to go to the CTAN server)

 \verb|cd macros/musixtex/taupin|

 \verb|binary|

 \verb|mget *.zip| (to get the zipped packages)

\medskip The whole \itxem{distribution} can fit into a single 1.2Mbyte or
1.44Mbyte diskette. All sources (including fonts) are provided,
either separately or ``zipped''.

{\sl REMARK: normally, the {\tt musixtex.zip} file expands into binary files
valid for any system, and text files (the \TeX{} and \MF{} sources) in the
\unix{} representation, namely with a ``LF'' character between each record. PC
users might complain that their own coding is ``CR+LF'' (``CR'' usually
appears as a ``{\tt \^{}M}''), but we checked that:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item the \ixem{MS-DOS} editor handles both denotations,
 \item the ``emacs'' and ``microemacs'' also do,
 \item the \TeX{} and \MF{} executable routines (et least the emTeX ones)
also accept both representations.
 \end{itemize}
 However, for the sake of compatibility, we now provide two routines for PC's,
namely {\tt dtou.exe} and {\tt utod.exe}, which convert text/source files
from/to the MS-DOS denotation to/from the \unix{} denotation.
}

 %\check
\section{Enhancements}
 \subsection{Recent easy enhancements} Many enhancements have been asked for,
to the ``father'' of \musixtex, namely \musictex, and this is a proof that it
is considered as useful by many people. Some of these enhancements which
seemed hard were in fact rather easy to implement, for example small notes to
represent grace notes and cadenzas, or gregorian chant features.

 Some of them were more difficult, such as handling of lyrics now provided
since version T.40.
 %\check
 \subsection{Enhancement limitations}
Many requested improvements have not been
\ital{yet} implemented for several reasons:
 \begin{itemize}
   \item The authors' natural laziness (!)
   \item More seriously: many of them would require using some more
registers; unfortunately, \TeX\ registers are not numerous (256 of each
kind and the limit of \keyindex{dimen} registers is nearly reached
(especially using \LaTeX), but we do our best).
   \item We do not think it is wise to introduce in \musixtex\ itself a great
number of macros which would be poorly used by most users: the reason is that
\TeX\ memory and --- moreover --- \TeX\ registers are severely limited and that
unused macros may occupy many of these, leading to things crashing
because of \verb|TeX capacity exceeded|.

 Therefore, many additional library files are now provided, which may be
invoked or not, depending on the user's specific needs. Most of them are used
to compile this \LaTeXe\ manual... except the {\tt musixadd.tex} and {\tt
musixmad.tex}.
 \end{itemize}
 %\check
  \section{Acknowledgements} The idea of implementing the present package is
due to the previous work (\mutex)\index{mutex@\protect\mutex} of \mbox{Andrea
{\sc Steinbach}} and Angelika {\sc Schofer}\footnote{Steinbach A. \& Schofer
A., \ital{Theses} (1987, 1988), Rheinische Friedrich-Wilhelms Universit\"at,
Bonn, Germany.}. This work provided the basis of the Metafont codes which are
still used here... with 100\% corrections and updates.\index{Schofer, A.@{\sc
Schofer, A.}}\index{Steinbach, A.@{\sc Steinbach, A.}}


 English language is progressively checked thanks to Cecil {\sc Churms} from
National Accelerator Center (South Africa).

 %\check
\chapter{Practical use}
\section{Heading statements}
Before any reference to \musixtex\ macros:

\verb|\input musixtex|\footnote{It is highly recommended to build up a format.
If you don't know how to do, you can refer to the same instruction you
perhaps heard or read before: ``Ask you local \TeX-wizard.''. Otherwise
it might be a good idea to look at chapter \ref{installation}
(``Installation'') where some hints are given to build a \musixtex\ format
(ref{formatbuild}).}

 %\check
 \noindent which may be followed by \verb|\input musixadd| in the case you
have more than six instruments or more than 6 simultaneous beams
or ties or slurs.\index{musixtex.tex@{\tt musixtex.tex}}
\index{musixadd.tex@{\tt musixadd.tex}}

 %\check
 After that, you may write a complete book of \TeX\ provided that you do not
use \verb|&| as a tabulation character (its \keyindex{catcode} has been
changed) inside the music score and that you do not overwrite \musixtex's
definitions. This means that no special macros have been designed to help you
write titles, author names, comments, literature excerpts, etc., unless you
use \LaTeX\ with the \verb|musixtex| style.\index{\&}
 %\check
 \section{Before you
begin to write notes}
 \subsection{Warnings for the non \TeX pert}
\begin{quote}

 %\check
When \TeX\ reads a parameter, it inputs one \ital{token}. This means
\ital{one} figure or \ital{one} character or \ital{one}
command\footnote{Syntactically, a \ital{command} is made of a
\ital{backslash} (``{\Bslash}'') immediately followed by sequence of
\ital{letters}.}. If you want to give more than one char or e.g. a negative
number(`-' is one token and a digit is one) or a command which reads another
parameter, then you have to use braces to transfer the parameter correctly.
For example, the command \verb|\meterfrac| reads two parameters; if you want
to declare a $\frac{8}{12}$ timing and you code: \verb|\meterfrac812|, then
you will get a $\frac{8}{1}$ timing and a misplaced ``\verb|2|''. The correct
coding is \verb|\meterfrac{8}{12}| or \verb|\meterfrac8{12}|.


 %\check
 The next problem is due to spaces. Spaces are ignored at the
beginning of a line. Spaces are ignored immediately behind a \TeX-command
(they indicate the end of that command unless \TeX\ finds characters which are
not \ital{letters}). All other spaces insert \ital{unexpected} space and
they will cause a lot of trouble during third pass. Same remark holds for end
of lines. Thus \verb|\bar| or \verb|\enotes| as last statement in current line
cause no trouble, because an end of line indicates to \TeX\ the end of a
command.

 %\check
 If you state \verb|\qu g| and start a new line, then you get into trouble, but
if you say \hbox{\verb|\qu g%|\relax
 $<new line><spaces>$}, you have no more problem
and this is better readable.

If this sounds complicated, remember that \TeX\ was designed to typeset
text and not music...

 \end{quote}
 %\check
 \subsection{What you have to specify}\label{whatspecify}
 \leavevmode
 You should first specify whether you want to typeset music in ``normal'' size
(20pt\index{sizes} per staff) or ``small'' size (16pt) or ``large'' size
(24pt). This is only optional, the default setting is
\keyindex{normalmusicsize}. If you want the smaller size, then you have to
say\footnote{This sets up not only the size of staff, but also the elementary
spacing and the space behind the bar rule.}  \keyindex{smallmusicsize},
\keyindex{largemusicsize}, and \keyindex{Largemusicsize} to have the larger
sizes of 24pt and 28.8pt.



 Then, the first compulsory declaration is:

 \keyindex{instrumentnumber}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|

 \noindent where $n$ is the number of instruments, used by
\musixtex\ to performs loops building staffs, setting signatures, meters,
etc. Therefore, it must be defined before any other statements.
If not then default value is one. An instrument
may consist of several staffs, e.g.~the piano. The difference between one
instrument of several staffs and several instruments is as follows:
\begin{itemize}
 \item distinct instruments may have distinct \itxem{signatures}, distinct
staffs of a unique instrument share the same signature.
 \item \itxem{stems} may be hung to \itxem{beams} belonging to differents
staffs of the same instrument.
 \item \itxem{chords} may extend across several staffs of the same
instrument.
 \item staffs of a unique \itxem{instrument} are tied together
with a big brace at the beginning of each line.
\end{itemize}
 If the number of staffs is not
equal to one, this number must be specified by:

 \keyindex{setstaffs} $n$\verb|{|$p$\verb|}|

 \noindent where $p$ is the number of staffs, and where $n$ is the
number of the instrument considered (e.g.~\verb|setstaffs3|
for the 3rd instrument, starting from the bottom).

 %\check
 Unless all your instruments only use the \ital{violin} clef, you
have to specify all the clefs used for all the instruments. This is done by
coding:

\keyindex{setclef}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}{|$s_1s_2s_3s_4$\verb|}%|

\noindent where $n$ is the number of the instrument, $s_1$ is one figure
specifying the clef of the lower staff, $s_2$ the clef of the second staff,
etc.

 The value $s_1=0$ means the \ital{violin} clef (G clef or \itxem{clef de
sol} in French) for the lower staff, $s_2=0$ means the violin clef for the
second staff, etc. If $s_2$, $s_3$ or $s_4$ are omitted in the second argument
of the \verb|\setclef|, these staffs have de default clef, namely 0, i.e. the
violin clef.

 The values $s_1=1$ through $s_1=4$
mean the \ital{alto} clef (\itxem{clef d'ut} in French) set on first (lower)
through fourth (next to upper) line of the staff.

 The value $s_1=5$ means the \ital{bass} clef at third (middle) line,
$s_1=6$ means the usual \ital{bass} clef (F clef or \itxem{clef de fa} in
French) at the usual fourth line, and $s_1=7$ means the \ital{bass}
(\itxem{subbass}) clef (F clef or \itxem{clef de fa} in
French) at the fifth line.

 The value  $s_1=8$ is not used.

 The value  $s_1=9$ means the \itxem{french violin clef}, an ancient feature
which sets the G clef (\ital{clef de sol} in French) at the fist line of the
staff.

 If remembering the digits associated with usual clefs seems too difficult,
one can also say 

 \verb|\setclef{|$n$\verb|}{|\keyindex{treble}\verb|}|

\noindent to get the \ixem{violin clef} on all staffs of the specified
instrument. In the same way the most used \itxem{alto clef} (alto clef on 3rd
line) can also be called with


 \verb|\setclef{|$n$\verb|}{|\keyindex{alto}\verb|}|

\noindent which sets the lower staff of thet instrument to the alto clef, but
sets other staffs above to the violin clef.
The usual \itxem{bass clef} on fourth line
can also be called with

 \verb|\setclef{|$n$\verb|}{|\keyindex{bass}\verb|}|

\noindent {\sl IMPORTANT: the commands \verb|\alto| and \verb|\bass| only set
these clefs at the first staff. Other staffs still have the default value of
violin clef.}
As an example, a standard piano score
should include:

 \keyindex{setclef}\verb|1{\bass}%| \quad or\quad
 \keyindex{setclef}\verb|1\bass|

\noindent taking account of the fact that the bass clef is set on the lower
staff, but the upper one has the default value of violin clef.
If the signature is not void, one should code:

 \keyindex{generalsignature}\verb|{|$s$\verb|}|

\noindent where $s>0$ indicates the number of \itxem{sharps} in the
signature and $s<0$ the number of \itxem{flats}\footnote{We have seen once a
score in G-minor where the signature consisted of two flats (B and E) plus
one sharp (F). This is not directly supported by \musixtex.}

 If a \itxem{meter} indication is to be posted, it should be
specified using the macro

 \keyindex{generalmeter}\verb|{|$m$\verb|}%|

 %\check
 \noindent where $m$ is the description of the meter indication which should
appear on each staff. If it is a \ital{fraction} (e.g.~3/4) on should code

 \verb|\generalmeter{\meterfrac{3}{4}}%|

\noindent or, in a simpler way (if the numbers are less than 10):

 \verb|\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}%|

You can suppress the beginning vertical rule with saying \keyindex{nostartrule}
and restore the default with \keyindex{startrule} after that.

 Special denotations can be used, such as \keyindex{meterC},
\keyindex{allabreve}, \keyindex{reverseC}, \keyindex{reverseallabreve} and
\keyindex{meterplus}.

 %\check
\begin{music}
\generalmeter\meterC
\nostartrule
\parindent0pt\startpiece
\NOtes\qa{cegj}\enotes
\generalmeter\allabreve\changecontext
\NOTes\ha{ce}\enotes
\generalmeter\reverseC\changecontext
\NOTEs\zbreve g\enotes
\generalmeter\reverseallabreve\changecontext
\NOTEs\zwq g\enotes
\generalmeter{\meterfrac{3\meterplus2\meterplus3}8}\changecontext
\Notes\Tqbu ceg\Dqbl jg\Tqbu gec\enotes
\endpiece
\end{music}
which was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\generalmeter\meterC
\nostartrule
\parindent0pt\startpiece
\NOtes\qa{cegj}\enotes
\generalmeter\allabreve\changecontext
\NOTes\ha{ce}\enotes
\generalmeter\reverseC\changecontext
\NOTEs\zbreve g\enotes
\generalmeter\reverseallabreve\changecontext
\NOTEs\zwq g\enotes
\generalmeter{\meterfrac{3\meterplus2\meterplus3}8}\changecontext
\Notes\Tqbu ceg\Dqbl jg\Tqbu gec\enotes
\endpiece
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 However, not all music scores have the same meter in each staff.
Especially, some staffs may have \ital{ternary} meters while others have
\ital{binary}. This can be specified by using the \keyindex{generalmeter} macro
to set the meter for most of the scores and overriding it by:

\keyindex{setmeter}\verb|2{{\meterfrac{12}8}\allabreve}%|

 \noindent which sets the meter to 12/8 for the first (lower)
staff, and \ital{alla breve} for the second staff of the instrument number 2.

Sometimes it might be useful to insert additional space before the meter is
written. This is possible by assigning a value to \keyindex{meterskip} in the
preamble. It is reset to zero after first meter indication.
 \subsection{Instrument names} If you want the \itxem{name of the instrument}s
(or the \itxem{name of the voice}s) to be displayed in front of their
respective staffs at the beginning, you may code:

\keyindex{setname} $n$\verb|{|\ital{name of the instrument}\verb|}%|

 %\check
 \noindent where $n$ is the number of the instrument
considered. In this case, you should also adjust the \keyindex{parindent}
dimension so that the long name of an instrument does not spill too far into
the left margin.
 \subsection{Polyphonic songs}
Except staffs of a unique instrument tied together with a big brace, staffs
normally begin on the left with a thin vertical rule. However, it is usual to
tie all human voices together with a left heavy and right thin vertical rule.

 \subsubsection{Case of only one choir}
 In the usual case where you have only one choir, this can be specified
by:
 \begin{quote}
\keyindex{songtop}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|\\
\keyindex{songbottom}\verb|{|$m$\verb|}|
\end{quote}
\noindent where $m$ and $n$ are the instrument numbers of the first
and last choral voices. Example is shown in \ref{song}.

 No heavy square brace is produced when the bottom instrument has a number
greater than the top one. This feature can be used to remove choir heavy
braces between distinct parts of the same score.

 \subsubsection{Case of several choirs or several orchestras}
 Your may divide your instruments into up to three groups linked together with
a left square brace. Each of these groups is specified with:
 \begin{quote}
\keyindex{grouptop}\verb|{|$g$\verb|}{|$n$\verb|}|\\
\keyindex{groupbottom}\verb|{|$g$\verb|}{|$m$\verb|}|
\end{quote}
\noindent where $m$ and $n$ are the instrument numbers of the first
and last choral voices of group number $g$. \musixtex{} allows up to three
groups, numbered from 1 to 3, plus the ``zero'' group consisting of the voices
or instruments which belong to no declared group. \verb|\songtop| is equivalent
to \verb|\grouptop 1| and \verb|\songbottom| is equivalent to
\verb|\groupbottom 1|.

 With {\tt musixadd.tex}, this number of groups is raised to four.

 This grouping feature can also be used to collect not only voices but also
instruments with one or several staffs. In that case the normal brace is
shifted left of the square havy brace.

 \subsection{Removing square choir braces}

 Previously defined square choir braces can be removed by stating a
\verb|\songtop| less than the \verb|\songbottom|. The same applies to
\verb|\grouptop| and \verb|\groupbottom| of the same group number.

 \subsection{Specifying all brackets together}

 Alternatively, you can use the following command for specifying all
required brackets together:
\begin{quote}
 \keyindex{akkoladen}\verb|{{|{\it lower\_1\/}\verb|}{|{\it upper\_1\/}%
   \verb|}{|{\it lower\_2\/}\verb|}{|{\it upper\_2\/}\verb|}{|%
   {\it lower\_3\/}\verb|}{|{\it upper\_3\/}\verb|}}|
\end{quote}
\noindent where {\it lower\_n\/} and {\it upper\_n\/} are instrument
numbers that denote the span of bracket number $n$. For
setting fewer than three brackets, just omit all unneeded
\verb|{|{\it lower\_n\/}\verb|}{|{\it upper\_n\/}\verb|}|~pairs;
\verb|\akkoladen{}| cancels all brackets.

Example:
\begin{quote}
 \verb|\instrumentnumber{5} \akkoladen{{1}{2}{3}{5}}|
\end{quote}
yields:\par\nopagebreak
\begin{music}
 % just to avoid wasting space ...
 \smallmusicsize\setsize1\smallvalue\setsize2\smallvalue
 \setsize3\smallvalue\setsize4\smallvalue\setsize5\smallvalue
 \instrumentnumber{5} \akkoladen{{1}{2}{3}{5}}
 \startextract \hardspace{2cm}\zendextract
\end{music}
which was coded as:

\begin{verbatim}
 \smallmusicsize\setsize1\smallvalue\setsize2\smallvalue
 \setsize3\smallvalue\setsize4\smallvalue\setsize5\smallvalue
 \instrumentnumber{5} \akkoladen{{1}{2}{3}{5}}
 \startextract \hardspace{2cm}\zendextract
\end{verbatim}



 %\check
\section{Starting your masterpiece}
 \subsection{Typing the first system}
Just code
\keyindex{startmuflex}

\noindent which opens the \ital{jobname}{\tt .mx1} during \TeX ing the first
time your masterpiece. All informations are now written to it. During pass 3
it will be open for read in and all computed values are used to set the
lines\footnote{The files must be closed before leaving \TeX, preferably before
\keyindex{bye} or \keyindex{end}, with \keyindex{endmuflex}. Normally \TeX\
closes all open files on his own when terminating the program, but it is still
wiser to do this explicitly.}.

\begin{remark} do not worry too much if you forget \verb|\startmuflex|; in
most cases --- since version T.39 --- the \verb|\startpiece| command will do
it, if necessary. Conversely, only the first \verb|\startmuflex| is effective,
the others are inefficient... for safety. \end{remark}

Then code

 %\check
\keyindex{startpiece}

\noindent which will initiate (with indentation \keyindex{parindent})
the first set of staffs for all instruments you have previously defined. But
that is not sufficient to begin writing notes and silences. In fact, you
must also choose the spacing of the notes.
 \subsection{Easy selecting note spacing}\label{newspacings}
Therefore, we preferred to provide the composer/typesetter with a
set of macros (incidentally, this can be adjusted):
\begin{center}
\tinynotesize
\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}% I hate LaTeX
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l@{~~~~}l|}
\multicolumn{1}{c}{usage}&
\multicolumn{1}{c}{spacing}&
\multicolumn{2}{c}{suggested use for}\\\hline
\keyindex{znotes}\verb| ... & ... & ... \enotes|&(non spacing)
  &&specials\\
\keyindex{notes}\verb|  ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=2=\keyindex{elemskip}
  &\ccu1&16th\\
\keyindex{notesp}\verb| ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=2.5\elemskip=
  &\pt1\ccu1&16th pointed, 8th triplet\\
\keyindex{Notes}\verb|  ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=3\elemskip=
  &\cu1&8th\\
\keyindex{Notesp}\verb| ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=3.5\elemskip=
  &\cup1&8th pointed, 4th triplet\\
\keyindex{NOtes}\verb|  ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=4\elemskip=
  &\qu1&4th\\
\keyindex{NOtesp}\verb| ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=4.5\elemskip=
  &\qup1&4th pointed, 2th triplet\\
\keyindex{NOTes}\verb|  ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=5\elemskip=
  &\hu1&2th\\
\keyindex{NOTesp}\verb| ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=5.5\elemskip=
  &\hup1&2th pointed\\
\keyindex{NOTEs}\verb|  ... & ... & ... \enotes|&\verb=6\elemskip=
  &\wh1&1th\\\hline
\end{tabular}\end{center}
\noindent
If you don't like them, define your own using e.g.:

\verb|\def\NOtes{\vnotes5.34\elemskip}|

 %\check
\noindent
which means, when you use this \keyindex{NOtes} definition, that all
\ital{spacing} notes and commands, results a spacing of 5.34 $\times$
\keyindex{elemskip}.
The size of the spatial unit (\keyindex{elemskip}) can be freely
adjusted (it shows only effect outside \verb|\startpiece...\endpiece|).

 In practice, the choice of the macro \verb|\notes|, \verb|\Notes|,
\verb|\NOtes|, etc., to initiate of column of notes sets an
internal dimension register, named \keyindex{noteskip} to the given multiple
of \keyindex{elemskip}. Thus, each \itxem{spacing note} (\keyindex{qu},
\keyindex{qb}, \keyindex{hl}, etc.) will be followed by a spacing of
\keyindex{noteskip}. Then, the advantage of the definition of \verb|\elemskip|
is that, whenever it is changed, all subsequent \verb|\noteskip|s
will be updated proportionally so that a simple change of \verb|\elemskip|
can expand or shrink all consecutive note spacings as a whole.

\medskip
{\bf All said above counts only for first pass.}

\medskip If the arthmetic progression of note spacings does not meet your
wishes, your may force a geometric progression, where {\Bslash Notes} is
$\sqrt{2}$ times wider as {\Bslash notes},  {\Bslash NOtes} is $\sqrt{2}$
times wider as {\Bslash Notes}, etc. In that case, {\Bslash Notesp} is
approximately $\sqrt{\sqrt{2}}=1.189$ times wider as {\Bslash Notes} and so
on. The geometric progression if forced by the command
\keyindex{geometricskipscale}, and the original arithmetic progression is
restored by \keyindex{arithmeticskipscale}.

 Inside the pair \verb|\notes...\enotes| you may freely change the value of
\verb|\noteskip| (not \verb|\elemskip|) provided you keep it scalable in the
normal situation\footnote{But: provided you keep it \ital{not scalable} if
you use the {\Bslash hardnotes} or {\Bslash hardlyrics} features (see
\ref{lyrics}).}. \verb|\noteskip| can be changed with a command like

\verb|\noteskip=2.4\noteskip|

\noindent which obviously keeps it scalable, or by means of

\keyindex{multnoteskip}\verb|{2.4}|

\noindent which performs the same multiplication in a smarter way. You can
also force all \verb|\noteskip|s to be re-scaled by a factor of 3.1415 using

\keyindex{scale}\verb|{2.4}|

\noindent or \verb|\def|\keyindex{scalenoteskip}\verb|{2.4}| which is more
dangerous and not advises although compatible with \musictex.

\medskip

To fill the music line (system) without glue, the values of \verb|\elemskip|,
\verb|\afterruleskip| and \verb|\beforeruleskip| are adjusted from the
external program {\tt musixflx}\index{musixflx@{\tt musixflx}}. So what
spacing you really get, depends on the internal line-breaking routine.

Spacings for advanced \musixtex'ers: a `normal' bar (slightly~!) magnified:
\medskip

 %\check
\begin{music}
\afterruleskip7pt
\beforeruleskip2pt
\parindent0pt
\setclefsymbol1\empty
% special problems afford special solutions
\makeatletter\global\clef@skip\z@ \makeatother
\startpiece
\zchar{16}{\hbox to\afterruleskip{\downbracefill}}%
\zchar{19}{\hbox to\afterruleskip{\hss a\hss}}%
\addspace\afterruleskip
\zchar{16}{\hbox to2\elemskip{\downbracefill}}%
\zchar{19}{\hbox to2\elemskip{\hss b\hss}}%
\zchar{3}{\hbox to\elemskip{\upbracefill}\hbox to\elemskip{\upbracefill}}%
\zchar{-1}{\hbox to\elemskip{\hss e\hss}\hbox to\elemskip{\hss e\hss}}%
\notes\qa l\en
\znotes\en
\zchar{16}{\hbox to4\elemskip{\downbracefill}}%
\zchar{19}{\hbox to4\elemskip{\hss c\hss}}%
\zchar{3}{\hbox to\elemskip{\upbracefill}\hbox to\elemskip{\upbracefill}%
  \hbox to\elemskip{\upbracefill}\hbox to\elemskip{\upbracefill}}%
\zchar{-1}{\hbox to\elemskip{\hss e\hss}\hbox to\elemskip{\hss e\hss}%
  \hbox to\elemskip{\hss e\hss}\hbox to\elemskip{\hss e\hss}}%
\NOtes\qa l\en
\znotes\en
\zchar{16}{\hbox to\beforeruleskip{\downbracefill}}%
\zchar{19}{\hbox to\beforeruleskip{\hss d\hss}}%
\endpiece
\end{music}
\begin{quote}\begin{tabular}{l@{~$\rightarrow$~}l}
a&\keyindex{afterruleskip}\\
b&\keyindex{notes}\verb| = \vnotes 2\elemskip|\\
c&\keyindex{NOtes}\verb| = \vnotes 4\elemskip|\\
d&\keyindex{beforeruleskip}\\
e&\keyindex{elemskip}
\end{tabular}\end{quote}
As default the values are set up as follows:
\begin{quote}\begin{tabular}{lrrr}\hline
\ital{using}&\keyindex{elemskip}&\keyindex{afterruleskip}
  &\keyindex{beforeruleskip}\\\hline
\keyindex{normalmusicsize}&6pt&8pt&0pt\\
\keyindex{smallmusicsize}&4.8pt&6pt&0pt\\\hline
\end{tabular}\end{quote}
\begin{quote}
If you want to change upper values, you have to do that behind
\verb|\normalmusicsize| or \verb|\smallmusicsize| and before
\verb|\startpiece|.
\end{quote}

 %\check
\section{Note pitch specification}
 Note pitches are usually specified by letters ranging from \verb|a| to
\verb|z| for those which are usually written under the G-clef (\verb|a|
corresponds to the $A$ of nominal frequency 222.5~Hz; the \ital{G} of the
G-clef is denoted \verb|g|). Lower pitch notes are specified using upper
case letters ranging from \verb|A| to \verb|N| (the \ital{F} of the F-clef
is denoted \verb|M|, and \verb|F| is one octave below).

 If necessary, a numeric symbol can be used to place a symbol
independently of the active clef, which has the drawback not to be
transposable.

 Besides, notes below \verb|A| (i.e. the $A$ of nominal frequency 55.625~Hz),
namely the lowest octave of the modern pianos, can only be coded using the
transposition features (see below: \ital{transposition} and
\ital{octaviation}) or in absolute vertical position using numbers.
 \section{Writing notes}
There are two major kinds of note macros: \begin{enumerate} \item those
which terminate a note/chord stem and are followed by a horizontal spacing of
value \keyindex{noteskip},
 \item those which initiate or extend a note/chord stem and do not cause
horizontal spacing.
\end{enumerate}
 The first kind is used to type a melody, the second kind is used to
type chords.
 \subsection{Single spacing notes}
\begin{quote}\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{breve}~$p$ :]breve note (\hbox to 8pt{\zbreve1\hss}) at pitch $p$.
 \item[\keyindex{longa}~$p$ :]longa note
  (\hbox to8pt{\zlonga1\hss}) at pitch $p$.
 \item[\keyindex{longaa}~$p$ :]same as \verb|\longa|, with an ``automatic''
stem up or down.
 \item[\keyindex{zmaxima}~$p$ :]maxima note
  (\hbox to16pt{\zmaxima1\hss}) at pitch $p$.
 \item[\keyindex{wq}~$p$ :]arbitrary duration note (also used as alternate
representation of \ital{breve} note)
  (\hbox to8pt{\zwq1\hss}) at pitch $p$.
 \item[\keyindex{wqq}~$p$ :]long arbitrary duration note (also used as alternate
representation of \ital{longa} note)
  (\hbox to8pt{\zwqq1\hss}) at pitch $p$.
 \item[\keyindex{wh}~$p$ :]whole note at pitch $p$.
 \item[\keyindex{hu}~$p$ :]half note at pitch $p$ with stem up.
 \item[\keyindex{hl}~$p$ :]half note at pitch $p$ with stem down.
 \item[\keyindex{ha}~$p$ :]half note at pitch $p$ with automatic
stem\footnote{This
means all stems belonging to notes below the third line are stemmed up,
the other down, they work with every clef, but only for single notes.} choice.
 \item[\keyindex{qu}~$p$ :]quarter note at pitch $p$ with stem up.
 \item[\keyindex{ql}~$p$ :]quarter note at pitch $p$ with stem down.
 \item[\keyindex{qa}~$p$ :]quarter note at pitch $p$ with ``automatic'' stem.
 \item[\keyindex{cu}~$p$ :]eighth note\footnote{The {\Bslash c} of this macro
 name is taken from the French word ``croche'' which is by the way one
 half of the english ``crotchet''; {\Bslash cc...}, {\Bslash ccc...}
 are standing for ``double croche'', ``triple croche'', etc.}
 at pitch $p$ with stem up.
 \item[\keyindex{cl}~$p$ :]eighth note at pitch $p$ with stem down.
 \item[\keyindex{ca}~$p$ :]eighth note at pitch $p$ with ``automatic'' stem.
 \item[\keyindex{ccu}~$p$ :]sixteenth note at pitch $p$ with stem up.
 \item[\keyindex{ccl}~$p$ :]sixteenth note at pitch $p$ with stem down.
 \item[\keyindex{cca}~$p$ :]sixteenth note at pitch $p$ with ``automatic'' stem.
 \item[\keyindex{cccu}~$p$ :]32-th note at pitch $p$ with stem up.
 \item[\keyindex{cccl}~$p$ :]32-th note at pitch $p$ with stem down.
 \item[\keyindex{ccca}~$p$ :]32-th note at pitch $p$ with ``automatic'' stem.
 \item[\keyindex{ccccu}~$p$ :]64-th note at pitch $p$ with stem up.
 \item[\keyindex{ccccl}~$p$ :]64-th note at pitch $p$ with stem down.
 \item[\keyindex{ccccl}~$p$ :]64-th note at pitch $p$ with ``automatic'' stem.
\end{description}\end{quote}
 As an example, the sequence:

 %\check
\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\cu c\cl j\enotes\bar
\Notes\ccu c\ccl j\enotes\bar
\Notes\cccu c\cccl j\enotes\bar
\Notes\ccccu c\ccccl j\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
 \noindent was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\cu c\cl j\enotes\bar
\Notes\ccu c\ccl j\enotes\bar
\Notes\cccu c\cccl j\enotes\bar
\Notes\ccccu c\ccccl j\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 If these notes are preceded by \ital{non-spacing} notes (i.e.
macros \keyindex{zq} or \keyindex{zh}) their stem is extended up or down so
as to join all notes into a single chord.
 \subsection{Non-spacing (chord) notes}
\begin{quote}\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{zq}~$p$ :]quarter (or shorter) note head at pitch $p$ with no
spacing after.
 \item[\keyindex{zh}~$p$ :]half note head at pitch $p$ with no spacing after.
\end{description}\end{quote}
 It must be pointed out that the pitch $p$ of these notes is
memorized so that the stem of the further spacing note will join them into
a chord. This stem top and bottom pitch is \ital{reset} at each spacing
note.

 \begin{remark} Notes of duration longer than whole notes are
always non-spacing. This saves one useless definition, since these notes are
always longer than other simultaneous ones. If needed they can be followed by
\keyindex{sk} to force spacing.
\end{remark}

 \subsection{Shifted non-spacing (chord) heads} These symbols are used mainly
in chords where \ital{second} intervals are present. It is the
responsibility of the typist to choose which heads should be shifted left or
right.

\begin{quote}\begin{description}
\item[\keyindex{rw}~$p$ :]whole note head shifted right by one note
width ($\approx$ 6pt), no spacing.
\item[\keyindex{lw}~$p$ :]whole note head shifted left by one note
width ($\approx$ 6pt), no spacing.
\item[\keyindex{rh}~$p$ :]half note head shifted right by one note
width ($\approx$ 6pt), no spacing.
\item[\keyindex{lh}~$p$ :]half note head shifted left by one note
width ($\approx$ 6pt), no spacing.
\item[\keyindex{rq}~$p$ :]quarter note head shifted right by one note
width ($\approx$ 6pt), no spacing.
\item[\keyindex{lq}~$p$ :]quarter note head shifted left by
one note width ($\approx$ 6pt), no spacing.
\end{description}\end{quote}
 %\check

 Except that they are shifted left of right, these macros act like
\verb|\z...| macros for stem building.
 \subsection{Single non-spacing notes}
\begin{quote}\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{zhu} :]half note with stem up but no spacing. It acts like
\verb|\hu| for stem building.
 \item[\keyindex{zhl} :]half note with stem down but no spacing. It acts like
\keyindex{hl} for stem building.
 \item[\keyindex{zqu} :]quarter note with stem up but no spacing. It acts like
\verb|\qu| for stem building.
 \item[\keyindex{zql} :]quarter note with stem down but no spacing. It acts
like \verb|\ql| for stem building.
 \item[\keyindex{zcu}, \keyindex{zccu}, \keyindex{zcccu}, \keyindex{zccccu}
:]eighth, ..., note with stem up but no spacing. It acts like
\verb|\cu| for stem building.
 \item[\keyindex{zcl}, \keyindex{zccl}, \keyindex{zcccl}, \keyindex{zccccl}
:]eighth, ..., note with stem down but no spacing. It acts
like \verb|\cl| for stem building.
 \item[\keyindex{zqb} :]note belonging to a beam but no spacing.
 \item[\keyindex{rhu}, \keyindex{rhl}, \keyindex{rqu}, \keyindex{rql},
  \keyindex{rcu}, \keyindex{rcl} :] \verb|\rhu| acts like \verb|\zhu|,
  but the note is shifted one note width on the right, other analogous.
 \item[\keyindex{lhu}, \keyindex{lhl}, \keyindex{lqu}, \keyindex{lql},
  \keyindex{lcu}, \keyindex{lcl} :]same
  as above, but the whole of the note is shifted one note width on the left.
 \item[\keyindex{zw}~$p$ :]whole note at pitch $p$ with no spacing after.
 \item[\keyindex{zwq}~$p$ :]arbitrary duration note
  (\hbox to8pt{\zwq1\hss}) at pitch $p$ with no spacing after.
 \item[\keyindex{zbreve}~$p$ :]breve note
  (\hbox to8pt{\zbreve1\hss}) at pitch $p$ with no spacing after.
 \item[\keyindex{zlonga}~$p$ :]longa note
  (\hbox to8pt{\zlonga1\hss}) at pitch $p$ with no spacing after.
 \item[\keyindex{zmaxima}~$p$ :]maxima note
  (\hbox to16pt{\zmaxima1\hss}) at pitch $p$ with no spacing after.
\end{description}\end{quote}
 %\check


\subsection{Single (spacing) stemless notes}

 Although not standard in real music scores, one may need to have stemless
quarter and half note heads posted in the same way as whole notes. This can be
done with the following commands:

\begin{quote}\begin{description}
\item[\keyindex{nh}~$p$ :]half note head at pitch $p$.
\item[\keyindex{nq}~$p$ :]quarter note head at pitch $p$.
\end{description}\end{quote}

\medskip As an example, the sequence:

\begin{music}
 \startextract
\notes\nq c\nq j\enotes\barre
\Notes\nh c\nh j\enotes\barre
\notes\nq {cdef}\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}

\medskip \noindent was coded as:

%\check
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\notes\nq c\nq j\enotes\barre
\Notes\nh c\nh j\enotes\barre
\notes\nq {cdef}\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 In case of special need, non spacing variants have been provided, namely
\keyindex{znh} and \keyindex{znq}.


 \subsection{Pointed notes}
One simple way of doing consists in putting \keyindex{pt
$p$} to get a \ital{dot} after the normal note head at pitch $p$. Thus a
quarter note with one point can be coded \verb|\pt h\qu h|, with two points
as \keyindex{ppt}\verb|\qu h| and with three points as
\keyindex{pppt}\verb|\qu h|.

 A simpler way of doing consists in using compact macros, namely:
\keyindex{whp}, \keyindex{whpp},
\keyindex{zwp}, \keyindex{zwpp},
\keyindex{hup}, \keyindex{hupp},
\keyindex{hlp}, \keyindex{hlpp},
\keyindex{zhp}, \keyindex{zhpp},
\keyindex{qup}, \keyindex{qupp},
\keyindex{qlp}, \keyindex{qlpp},
\keyindex{zqp}, \keyindex{zqpp},
\keyindex{cup}, \keyindex{cupp},
\keyindex{clp}, \keyindex{clpp},
\keyindex{qbp} and \keyindex{qbpp}.
Where all \verb|\z...p| are useful in chords.

 You may also introduce pointed notes, especially in groups by coding
a \ital{period} before (not after) the letter representing the pitch:
\verb|\qu{.a.^b.c}| which is equivalent to:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\pt{a}\qu{a}\pt{b}\sh{b}\qu{b}\pt{c}\qu{c}
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
Finally, pointed notes can also be produced without spacing after, using
\keyindex{zhup}, \keyindex{zhlp}, \keyindex{zqup}, \keyindex{zqlp},
\keyindex{zcup}, \keyindex{zclp}, \keyindex{zqbp},
and the same with two \verb|p|'s for
double-pointed notes, like \keyindex{zhupp}, \keyindex{zhlpp},
\keyindex{zqupp}, \keyindex{zqlpp},
\keyindex{zcupp}, \keyindex{zclpp} and \keyindex{zqbpp}.

If two voices share one staff, the points of the lower voice are lowered,
if the note is on a note line. Therefore you can use \keyindex{lpt}~$p$ and
\keyindex{lppt}~$p$.

 %\check
\section{Beams}

 Beams are not automatically handled, but they must be declared explicitely,
\ital{before} the first spacing note involving them is coded. Two kinds of
macros are provided:

\begin{enumerate}

 \item fixed slope beams have an arbitrary slope chosen by the user in
the range -45\% to +45\% (by multiples of 5\%);

 \item semi-automatic beams have their slope computed knowing the number
of \keyindex{noteskip} over which they are supposed to extend, and knowing the
initial and final pitch of the notes they are supposed to link.
\end{enumerate}
 %\check
 \subsection{Fixed slope beams}
 \subsubsection{Beam initiation}
\begin{quote}\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{ibu}~$nps$ :]initiates an \ital{upper beam} 3 horizontal
line spacings above the pitch $p$~; $n$ is its reference number, which must be
in the range [0-5] ([0-8] if \verb|musixadd| file has been \verb|\input|);
$s$ is the slope of the beam.
\end{description}\end{quote}
 $s$ is an integer in the range [-9,9].
$s=1$ means a slope of 5\%, $s=9$ means a slope of 45\%,
$s=-3$ means a slope of -15\%, etc.
With usual spacings a slope of 2 or 3 is fit for ascending scales. A slope of
6 to 9 is fit for ascending arpeggios.

\begin{quote}\begin{description}

 \item[\keyindex{ibl}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{lower beam} 3 horizontal line
spacings below the pitch $p$. Other parameters as above.

 \item[\keyindex{ibbu}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{double upper beam} (same
parameter meaning).
 \item[\keyindex{ibbl}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{double lower beam} (same
parameter meaning).
 \item[\keyindex{ibbbu}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{triple upper beam} (same
parameter meaning).
 \item[\keyindex{ibbbl}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{triple lower beam} (same
parameter meaning).
 \item[\keyindex{ibbbbu}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{quadruple upper beam} (same
parameter meaning).
 \item[\keyindex{ibbbbl}~$nps$ :]initiates a \ital{quadruple lower beam} (same
parameter meaning).
\end{description}\end{quote}

Notes belonging to beams are coded in the form \keyindex{qb}~$np$ where $n$ is
the beam number and $p$ the pitch of the note head. \musixtex\ adjusts the
length of the note stem to link the bottom of the chord to a beam.

 \subsubsection{Beam termination}
 Beam termination is also not automatic. The termination of a given
beam must be explicitely declared \ital{before} coding the last spacing note
connected to that beam.
\begin{quote}\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{tbu}~$n$ :]terminates upper beam number $n$ at current
position. \item[\keyindex{tbl}~$n$ :]terminates lower beam number $n$ at
current position.
\end{description}\end{quote}
\keyindex{tbu} and \keyindex{tbl} terminate beams of any
multiplicity. Therefore 32-th notes hanging on a triple beam are initiated by
\keyindex{ibbbu}~$nps$ and terminated by \keyindex{tbu}~$n$.

 Since beams usualy finish with a \verb|\qb| to link the last note, shorter
macros have been provided:

 \begin{itemize}

 \item \keyindex{tqb} $np$ is equivalent to \verb|\tbl| $n$\verb|\qb| $np$

 \item \keyindex{tqh} $np$ is equivalent to \verb|\tbu| $n$\verb|\qb| $np$

 \item \keyindex{ztqb} $np$ is equivalent to \verb|\tbl| $n$\verb|\zqb| $np$
(no spacing after)

 \item \keyindex{ztqh} $np$ is equivalent to \verb|\tbu| $n$\verb|\zqb| $np$
(no spacing after)

 \end{itemize}

 \subsubsection{Beams of increasing multiplicity}
 It is also possible to code beams whose multiplicity is not the same
at the beginning. The multiplicity can be increased at any position. For
instance, \keyindex{nbbu}~$n$ which sets the multiplicity of upper beam
number $n$ to 2 starting at the current position, \keyindex{nbbbu}~$n$ sets
its multiplicity to 3 and \keyindex{nbbbbu}~$n$ sets its multiplicity to 4.
\keyindex{nbbl}~$n$ \dots
\keyindex{nbbbbl}~$n$ perform the same functions for lower beams.


 Note that the difference between upper and lower beams does not
mainly consist in the beam being above or below the note heads; rather, it
specifies whether the abscissa of the beginning and the end of this beam is
aligned on the right (upper beam) or on the left (lower) beam. Thus, the
sequence:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibu0h0\qb0e\nbbu0\qb0e\nbbbu0\qb0e\nbbbbu0\qb0e\tbu0\qb0e\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent has been coded as
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibu0h0\qb0e\nbbu0\qb0e\nbbbu0\qb0e\nbbbbu0\qb0e\tbu0\qb0e\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 It is quite possible to terminate with \keyindex{tbu} a beam initiated
with \keyindex{ibl}. This may give:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibl0p0\qb0p\nbbl0\qb0p\nbbbl0\qb0p\tbu0\qb0e\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent which has been coded as
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibl0p0\qb0p\nbbl0\qb0p\nbbbl0\qb0p\tbu0\qb0e\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \subsubsection{Beams of decreasing multiplicity}
 Partial termination of beams is also possible, by using \keyindex{tbbu}
or \keyindex{tbbl}~: these macros terminate the current beam except that of
order 1 (eighths). \keyindex{tbbbu} or \keyindex{tbbbl} terminate the current
beam except those of order 1 and 2, etc.

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibbbu0h0\qb0e\tbbbu0\qb0e\tbbu0\qb0e\tbu0\qb0e\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent has been coded as

\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\Notes\ibbbu0h0\qb0e\tbbbu0\qb0e\tbbu0\qb0e\tbu0\qb0e\enotes
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

The macros \keyindex{tbbu} and \keyindex{tbbl} and higher order
may also be invoked when only
a single beam is active. Then, a second beam or third or ...
(upper or lower according
the initiating procedure) is opened \ital{one note width before
the current position, and closed immediately}. Thus the following sequences

\begin{music}
\let\extractline\hbox
\hbox to \hsize{%
\hss
  \startextract
  \Notes\ibu0e0\qbp0e\tbbu0\tbu0\qb0e\en
  \endextract
\hss\hss
  \startextract
  \Notes\ibu0e0\qbpp0e\tbbbu0\tbbu0\tbu0\qb0e\en
  \endextract
\hss}
\end{music}
\noindent are coded:
\hspace*{\fill}\begin{minipage}{.4\textwidth}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibu0e0\qbp0e%
  \tbbu0\tbu0\qb0e\en
\end{verbatim}\end{minipage}\hfill
\begin{minipage}{.4\textwidth}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibu0e0\qbpp0e%
  \tbbbu0\tbbu0\tbu0\qb0e\en
\end{verbatim}\end{minipage}\hfill

\noindent The same behaviour occurs in the case of \keyindex{tbbbu},
\keyindex{tbbbl}, \keyindex{tbbbbu} and \keyindex{tbbbbl}.
 The symmetrical pattern is also possible. For example:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibbl0j0\roff{\tbbl0}\qb0j\tbl0\qbp0j\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent has been coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibbl0j0\roff{\tbbl0}\qb0j\tbl0\qbp0j\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \begin{remark} these codings may seem complicated. In fact,
it is the responsibility of the user to define macros which perform the most
common sequences in his masterpiece. For example, one could define sets of
four sixteenths by the macro:

\verb|\def\qqh#1#2#3#4#5{\ibbl0#2#1\qb#2\qb#3\qb#4\tbl0\qb#5}|

\noindent where the first argument is the slope and the other four
arguments are the pitches of the four consecutive sixteenths wanted.
\end{remark}


\noindent A slightly more complicated example is:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\notes\ibbbu0e0\roff{\tbbbu0}\qb0f\en
\notesp\tbbu0\qbp0f\en
\Notes\tbu0\qb0f\en
\notesp\ibbu0f0\roff{\tbbu0}\qbp0f\en
\Notes\qb0f\en
\notes\tbbbu0\tbbu0\tbu0\qb0f\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent has been coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\notes\ibbbu0e0\roff{\tbbbu0}\qb0f\en
\notesp\tbbu0\qbp0f\en
\Notes\tbu0\qb0f\en
\notesp\ibbu0f0\roff{\tbbu0}\qbp0f\en
\Notes\qb0f\en
\notes\tbbbu0\tbbu0\tbu0\qb0f\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 %\check
 \subsection{Repeated pattern beams}\index{repeated patterns}
Note heads hanging on beams are not necessarily quarter (or higher order)
note heads. It is possible to hang half note heads on beams
using \keyindex{hb} macro, e.g.:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibbl0j0\hb0j\tbl0\hb0j\enotes
\Notes\ibbu0g0\hb0g\tbu0\hb0g\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent has been coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibbl0j0\hb0j\tbl0\hb0j\enotes
\Notes\ibbu0g0\hb0g\tbu0\hb0g\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


It is also possible to write

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibbl0j3\wh j\tbl0\wh l\enotes
\Notes\ibbu0g3\wh g\tbu0\wh i\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent which was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibbl0j3\wh j\tbl0\wh l\enotes
\Notes\ibbu0g3\wh g\tbu0\wh i\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\noindent However, a better look could be obtained in a more sophisticated
way\footnote{You are suggested to make your own macro if you have to type many
of these, or better: use a pre-compiler.}:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\loff{\zw j}\ibbl0j3\sk\tbl0\wh l\enotes
\Notes\ibbu0g3\wh g\tbu0\roff{\wh i}\enotes\qspace
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent which was simply coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\loff{\zw j}\ibbl0j3\sk\tbl0\wh l\enotes
\Notes\ibbu0g3\wh g\tbu0\roff{\wh i}\enotes\qspace
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 Single repeated notes can also be made --- in a much more sophisticated
way\footnote{But you can write your own macro, thinking of using
{\tt\char92transpose} to lift the oblique beams.}, for example:

 \begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibl0h0\qb0{hhh}\tbl0\qb0h\bsk\bsk\bsk\bsk
      \ibu0j0\qb0{jjj}\tbu0\qb0j\en
\NOTes\loffset{0.5}{\ibl0j9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbl0}\zhl h%
      \loffset{0.5}{\ibu0g9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbu0}\hu j\en\bar
\notes\ibbl0i0\qb0{hhh}\tbl0\qb0h\bsk\bsk\bsk\bsk
      \ibbu0i0\qb0{jjj}\tbu0\qb0j%
      \ibbl0i0\qb0{hhh}\tbl0\qb0h\bsk\bsk\bsk\bsk
      \ibbu0i0\qb0{jjj}\tbu0\qb0j\en
\NOTes\loffset{0.5}{\ibbl0k9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbl0}\zhl h%
      \loffset{0.5}{\ibbu0f9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbu0}\hu j\en
\endextract
 \end{music}
 \noindent whose coding (due to W. {\sc Icking}) is;

\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\ibl0h0\qb0{hhh}\tbl0\qb0h\bsk\bsk\bsk\bsk
      \ibu0j0\qb0{jjj}\tbu0\qb0j\en
\NOTes\loffset{0.5}{\ibl0j9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbl0}\zhl h%
      \loffset{0.5}{\ibu0g9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbu0}\hu j\en\bar
\notes\ibbl0i0\qb0{hhh}\tbl0\qb0h\bsk\bsk\bsk\bsk
      \ibbu0i0\qb0{jjj}\tbu0\qb0j%
      \ibbl0i0\qb0{hhh}\tbl0\qb0h\bsk\bsk\bsk\bsk
      \ibbu0i0\qb0{jjj}\tbu0\qb0j\en
\NOTes\loffset{0.5}{\ibbl0k9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbl0}\zhl h%
      \loffset{0.5}{\ibbu0f9}\roffset{0.5}{\tbu0}\hu j\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \subsection{Beams across bars}
The usual way most composers wrote their scores was beams inside bars,
at least until the beginning of the XIX-th
century. Unfortunately, later composers ({\sc Brahms}, {\sc Scriabin},
{\sc Grieg}, etc.) wanted to write beams jumping across bars.
This is possible without any problems.
We give an example from {\sc Brahms}'s Intermezzo op.~118,1 provided by
Miguel {\sc Filgueiras}:\index{Brahms, J.@{\sc Brahms, J.}}\medskip

\begin{music}
\interstaff{12}
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1\bass
\generalmeter\allabreve
\startextract
\NOtes\qp\nextstaff\isluru0q\zq{q}\ql{j}\enotes
\bar
\nspace
\Notes\ibu0L2\qb0{CEJLcL}%
  \nextstaff\roff{\zw{l}}\pt{p}\zh{_p}\pt{i}\hl{_i}\enotes
\Notes\qb0J\itied1a\qb0a\nextstaff\tslur0o\zq{o}\ql{h}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ttie1\zh{.L.a}\hl{.e}%
  \nextstaff\qb0{chj}\tbl0\qb0l\cl{q}\ds\enotes
\NOtes\qp\nextstaff\zq{q}\ql{j}\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
 %\check
\noindent whose coding is:
\begin{verbatim}
\interstaff{13}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1\bass
\generalmeter\allabreve
\startextract
\NOtes\qp\nextstaff\isluru0q\zq{q}\ql{j}\enotes
\bar
\nspace
\Notes\ibu0a1\qb0{CEJLcL}%
  \nextstaff\roff{\zw{l}}\pt{p}\zh{_p}\pt{i}\hl{_i}\enotes
\Notes\qb0J\itied1a\qb0a\nextstaff\tslur0o\zq{o}\ql{h}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ttie1\zh{.L.a}\hl{.e}%
  \nextstaff\qb0{chj}\tbl0\qb0l\cl{q}\ds\enotes
\NOtes\qp\nextstaff\zq{q}\ql{j}\enotes
\endextract
\end{verbatim}
Still to be done manually is the cut and prolongation across line breaks, which
can be easily be done with shifting using \keyindex{roff} and/or
\keyindex{loff}, or with insert of a spacing command (here done with
\keyindex{hsk}). We give an example from {\sc Grieg}'s ``Hochzeit auf
Troldhaugen'':\index{Grieg, E.@{\sc Grieg, E.}}\medskip

\begin{music}
\parindent0pt
\def\rqs{\lower\Interligne\rlap\qs}
\def\snotes{\vnotes1\elemskip}
\setstaffs1{2}
\generalsignature{2}
\setclef1{\bass}
\interstaff{12}
\startpiece
%%% bar 1
\addspace\afterruleskip
\snotes|\tinynotesize\ibsluru0n\ibbu0m5\qb0{=m}\tqh0n\en
\qspace
\Notes\zchar{-7}\sPed\loffset{.3}{\fl E}\zq E\qu{_I}%
  |\zql g\ibu2l0\busf2\qb2{=m}\en
\Notes|\tubslur0o\qb2{_l}\en
\Notes\loffset{.3}{\fl L}\zq L\ibl0L0\qb0{_b}%
  |\ibl1h0\zqb1g\bupz2\qb2l\en
\Notes\zq L\tqb0b|\tbl1\zqb1g\bupz2\tqh2l\en
\NOtes\zq L\ql b|\zql g\qu l\en
\notes\zchar{-7}\sPed\zchar{-7}{\eightit ~~~sempre}%
  \zchar{14}{\pp\eightit~sempre}\zq I\ibbu1J0\qb1L|\qs\en
\notes\qs|\zq N\ibbu3d0\qb3{_d}\en
\notes\qb1E|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\fl e\zq N\rq e\qb3d\en
%%% bar 2
\bar
\notes\loffset{.3}{\fl I}\zq I\qb1{_L}|\rqs\en
\qspace
\notes\qs|\lfl d\zq d\zq {=f}\qb3N\en
\notes\tqh1{_E}|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\zq d\zq g\tqh3N\en
\notes\zq I\ibbu0J0\qb0L|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\zq d\ibbu1d0\qb1N\en
\notes\qb0E|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\fl e\rq e\zq d\qb1N\en
\notes\zq I\qb0L|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\zq f\zq d\qb1N\en
\notes\tqh0E|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\zq g\zq d\tqh1N\en
\notes\zq I\ibbu0J0\qb0L|\rqs\en
\notes\qs|\zq d\ibbu1d0\qb1N\en
\notes\qb0E|\rqs\en
\notes\rlap\qs\hsk\tbu0|\rq e\zq d\zqb1N\hsk\tbu1\en
\endpiece
\end{music}
\noindent where the prolongation was coded as:
\begin{verbatim}
\notes\rlap{\qs}\hsk\tbu0|\rq e\zq d\zqb1N\hsk\tbu1\en
\end{verbatim}
 %\check
 \subsection{Semi-automatic beams}
In order to avoid tedious checks to adjust the slope (and even the starting
pitch) of beams in music with a lot of steep beams, a set of automatically
slope computing has recently been implemented. If
you say \verb|\Ibu2gj3| \musixtex\ will understand that`you want to
build an upper beam (beam number 2) horizontally extending \verb|3\noteskip|,
the first note of which is a \verb|g| and the last note is a \verb|j|.
Knowing these parameters it will choose the highest slope number which
corresponds to a slope not more than $(\hbox{\tt j}-\hbox{\tt
g})/(3\keyindex{noteskip})$. Moreover, if there is no sufficiently steep beam
slope available, then it will raise the starting point.

 Eight such macros are available: \keyindex{Ibu}, \keyindex{Ibbu},
\keyindex{Ibbbu}, \keyindex{Ibbbbu}, \keyindex{Ibl}, \keyindex{Ibbl},
\keyindex{Ibbbl} and \keyindex{Ibbbbl}.

Also available are ready definitions for often needed sets of double,
triple and quadruple notes with computed slopes. These are:
\keyindex{Dqbu}, \keyindex{Dqbl}, \keyindex{Dqbbu}, \keyindex{Dqbbl},
\keyindex{Tqbu}, \keyindex{Tqbl}, \keyindex{Tqbbu}, \keyindex{Tqbbl},
\keyindex{Qqbu}, \keyindex{Qqbl}, \keyindex{Qqbbu} and \keyindex{Qqbbl}.
  %\check


\medskip
\begin{music}
\parindent0pt\startpiece
\Notes\Dqbu gh\Dqbl jh\en
\notes\Dqbbu fg\Dqbbl hk\en\bar
\Notes\Tqbu ghi\Tqbl mmj\en
\notes\Tqbbu fgj\Tqbbl njh\en\bar
\Notes\Qqbu ghjh\Qqbl jifh\en
\notes\Qqbbu fgge\Qqbbl jhgi\en\endpiece
\end{music}
\noindent which was simply coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\Dqbu gh\Dqbl jh\en
\notes\Dqbbu fg\Dqbbl hk\en\bar
\Notes\Tqbu ghi\Tqbl mmj\en
\notes\Tqbbu fgj\Tqbbl njh\en\bar
\Notes\Qqbu ghjh\Qqbl jifh\en
\notes\Qqbbu fgge\Qqbbl jhgi\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 %\check

\section{Rests}
 Except that difference that they have no specific pitch, rests are coded in a
very simple way.
 \subsection{Ordinary rests}
 Full bar rests (also called ``pauses'') are coded as
\keyindex{pause}, with a point behind as \keyindex{pausep};
smaller rests are
\keyindex{hpause} (of duration equal to a \ital{half note}),
with a point behind as \keyindex{hpausep},
\keyindex{qp} (duration equal to a \ital{quarter note},
  also \keyindex{soupir}),
\keyindex{ds} (duration equal to an \ital{eighth note}),
\keyindex{qs} (duration equal to an \ital{sixteenth note}),
\keyindex{hs} (duration equal to an \ital{thirty second note}),
\keyindex{qqs} (duration equal to an \ital{sixty fourth note}).

 Long rests (lasting several bars) can be coded as \keyindex{PAuse}
and \keyindex{PAUSe}, which respectively yield:

\begin{music}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\startextract
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerbar\PAuse\en}%
\NOTEs\en\bar
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerbar\PAUSe\en}%
\NOTEs\en\endextract
\end{music}
 %\check

 \subsection{Lifted rests}\index{lifting rests}\index{rest lifting} All the
previous rests with exception of \keyindex{pausep} (pause with a point) and
\keyindex{hpausep} (half rest with a point) are \ital{hboxes}; this means that
they can be vertically offset to meet polyphonic music requirements using the
standard \TeX\ command \keyindex{raise}. For example:

 \begin{quote}
 \begin{verbatim}
 \raise 2\Interligne\qp
 \raise 3mm\qq
 \end{verbatim}
 \end{quote}

 \noindent{\sl{\bfseries CAUTION:} do not try to lift rests (or notes but this
looks so silly that...) using codings like
\verb|\raise2mm|\keyindex{hbox}\verb|{\qp}|. The reason is that the rest
symbol (e.g. \verb|\qp|) is embedded in braces, so that local counting of
spaces (register \verb|\loc@skip|) will be lost, resulting in turn in
overfull/undfull boxes, beam errors, erratic slurring, etc. In general, all
rests and all notes should be coded at the brace level of the \verb|\notes|
command, unless they are deliberately embedded in \keyindex{rlap} or
\keyindex{llap} which actually overlook spacing counting but finally force no
horizontal spacing, a behaviour which compensates the forgotten spacing count.}

 In addition, two symbols have been provided to put a \itxem{full rest} or a
\itxem{half rest} above or below the staff. Then the ordinary \verb|\pause| or
\verb|\hpause| cannot be used since there is a need for small horizontal line
to distinguish between the full and the half rest. They are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \keyindex{liftpause}~$n$ (non spacing) to get a
  \hbox to10pt{\liftpause{-2}\hss}
  raised from original position by $n$ staff line intervals,
 \item \keyindex{lifthpause}~$n$ (non spacing) to get
  \hbox to10pt{\lifthpause{-1}\hss} raised the same way.
 \item \keyindex{liftpausep}~$n$ (non spacing) to get a
  \hbox to10pt{\liftpausep{-2}\hss}
  raised from original position by $n$ staff line intervals,
 \item \keyindex{lifthpausep}~$n$ (non spacing) to get
  \hbox to10pt{\lifthpausep{-1}\hss} raised the same way.
 \end{itemize}
 %\check

 \subsection{Bar centered rests}\label{barcentered}
Sometimes it is necessary to place a rest (or other) exactly in the middle
of a bar. This can be done with more sophisticated commands:
%\keyindex{atnextbar}
\keyindex{centerbar},
\keyindex{centerPAUSe},
\keyindex{centerPAuse},
\keyindex{centerpause},
\keyindex{centerhpause}.
For example:

\begin{music}
\generalmeter\meterC
\setclef1\bass
\setstaffs1{2}
\parindent0pt
\startpiece\addspace\afterruleskip
\NOtes|\qa{cegj}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerpause\en}\bar
\NOtes|\qa{jgec}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerpause\en}\bar
\Notes\ca{`jihgfedc}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes|\centerpause\en}\bar
\NOTes\ha{Nc}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes|\centerpause\en}\bar
\addspace{10\elemskip}%
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerbar\duevolte|\centerbar\duevolte\en}\endpiece
\end{music}
\begin{verbatim}
\generalmeter\meterC
\setclef1\bass
\setstaffs1{2}
\parindent0pt
\startpiece\addspace\afterruleskip
\NOtes|\qa{cegj}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerpause\en}\bar
\NOtes|\qa{jgec}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerpause\en}\bar
\Notes\ca{`jihgfedc}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes|\centerpause\en}\bar
\NOTes\ha{Nc}\en
\def\atnextbar{\znotes|\centerpause\en}\bar
\addspace{10\elemskip}%
\def\atnextbar{\znotes\centerbar{\duevolte}|\centerbar{\duevolte}\en}\endpiece
\end{verbatim}
 %\check

\section{Phantom notes and spacing commands}\label{spacing}
It may be interesting, when coding a sequence of notes within a unique pair
\verb|\notes...\enotes|, to skip one note place in order -- for
example -- to set the third note of one staff at the same abscissa as that of
the second note of another staff. This can be done by inserting \keyindex{sk}
which causes a spacing of one \keyindex{noteskip}\footnote{Never use
\keyindex{kern} nor \keyindex{hskip}~: in fact \keyindex{sk} not only causes
a space but also records that space for correct handling of beams, slurs,
trills, octaviation dashed lines, line-breaking, etc.}. Sometimes it is useful
to \ital{skip back} one noteskip, this can be done with \keyindex{bsk}. The
spacing of a half \verb|\noteskip| can be yielded with \keyindex{hsk}.

 %\check

 If you just want to shift a note or a symbol by one note head width,
you may write \keyindex{roff}\verb|{|\ital{note/symbol}\verb|}| (shift right)
or \keyindex{loff}\verb|{|\ital{note/symbol}\verb|}| (shift left).
 If you just want to shift a note or a symbol by one half note head width,
you may write \keyindex{hroff}\verb|{|\ital{note/symbol}\verb|}| (shift right)
or \keyindex{hloff}\verb|{|\ital{note/symbol}\verb|}| (shift left).
For example, to get
 %\check


\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\roff{\zwh g}\qu g\qu h\qu i\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
you code:

 %\check

\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\roff{\zwh g}\qu g\qu h\qu i\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

If you want to shift notes or symbols right by more or less than one note head
width, then you can use \keyindex{roffset} (or \keyindex{loffset} in the other
direction) which has an additional first argument which is the number of note
head widths the second argument should be shifted by. For example

\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\roffset{1.5}{\zwh g}\qu g\qu h\qu i\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
was coded:

\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\roffset{1.5}{\zwh g}\qu g\qu h\qu i\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

\begin{important} the offset specified or implicitly specified in
\verb|\roff|, \verb|\loff|, \verb|\roffset| and \verb|loffset| does not add to
the total spacing amount; in other words this is just an offset, not a
spacing. Conversely, the possible spacing of commands included in the argument
of \verb|\roff|/\verb|\loff| and in the second argument
of \verb|\roffset|/\verb|\loffset| actually adds to the total spacing in that
bar of the current staff. Therefore, the symbol/note argument of these offset
commands should usually produce no spacing, i.e. begin with \verb|\z|.

 Besides, it is not advised to insert several consecutive spacing notes in
the \verb|\roff|/\verb|\loff| or \verb|\roffset|/\verb|\loffset| arguments,
since it could mess up the global spacing accounting.
 \end{important}

 %\check


To insert spacing of \ital{nearly} one \ital{note head width}, you can use
\keyindex{qsk}(which has the drawback, that it is scalable, so what spacing
you really get depends on the computed \verb|\elemskip| from \verb|musixflx|
and the user chosen value of \verb|\elemskip|). The half of this spacing can
be forced with \keyindex{hqsk}. Note that these two latter macros must be used
inside a pair \verb|\notes...\enotes|.

 If you want to insert additional spacing before a group of notes, especially
to avoid a collision with an accidental, you can write \keyindex{nspace} ---
outside the \verb|\notes...\enotes| group --- and this will produces an
additional spacing of a half note head width; in the same way,
\keyindex{qspace} will yield a spacing of a note head width. Note that
\verb|\nspace| and \verb|\qspace| are ``hard'' spacings, whose general
feature is \verb|\hardspace|, described below.

Sometimes the additional space behind \keyindex{changecontext}
disturbs the eye of a typesetter, but this ugly spacing can be reduced with:

\keyindex{addspace}\verb|{-|\keyindex{afterruleskip}\verb|}%|

It should be emphasized that all these spacing commands work correctly, only
when their dimension arguments are \itxem{scalable values} and not fixed
dimensions; the scalable dimensions are \keyindex{elemskip},
\keyindex{beforeruleskip}, \keyindex{afterruleskip}, \keyindex{noteskip} and
their multiples.

The only spacing command which can work with ``normal'' (that is,
\ital{not scalable}) dimensions is:\label{hardspace}\index{hard spacing}


\keyindex{hardspace}\verb|{|\ital{any \TeX~dimension}\verb|}%|

\noindent but both \verb|\addspace| and \verb|\hardspace| can only be used
outside of \verb|\notes...\enotes|.

Conversely, a more general spacing is allowed within the
\verb|\notes...\enotes| pairs, namely:

\keyindex{off}\verb|{|$D$\verb|}%|

\noindent where $D$ is a \itxem{scalable dimension}, for example
\verb|\noteskip| or \verb|\elemskip|. In fact, if you look to the
\musixtex\ source, you will find that \verb|\off| is the basic control
sequence used to define \keyindex{sk}, \keyindex{qsk}, etc.

 %\check

\section{Collective coding: sequences of notes}

As seen in the {\sc Mozart} example, it is not necessary to write a macro
sequence \verb|\notes...\enotes| for each column\footnote{Although
the compiler compiles it faster.}. If, on all
staffs of all instruments, spacings are equal or multiple of a unique value,
the notes may be concatenated in each staff: each note in each staff makes
the current position horizontally advance by the elementary spacing specified
by the choice of \verb|\notes|, \verb|\Notes|, \verb|\NOtes|, etc.

 The major interest of this feature resides in that fact that
the note macros are able to write several items; for instance
\verb|\qu{cdefghij}| writes the \ital{C-major} scale in quarters with
stem up. In the same way \verb|\cl{abcdef^gh}| writes the
\ital{A-minor} scale in eighths. Not all note generating macros can be
used to perform collective coding, but most of them can.

 If necessary a void space\footnote{same behaviour as {\Bslash sk}}
can be inserted in a collective coding by using \verb|*|\index{*}.

 %\check

\section{Accidentals}

Accidentals can be introduced in two ways.

 The first way, the \ital{manual} way of coding them, consists for
example in coding \keyindex{fl}\verb|a| to put a \ital{flat} at the
pitch $a$, supposedly before the further note of that pitch.
There is no control upon the fact that a note will be put at this position
and at this pitch.
Naturals, sharps, double flats and double sharps are coded \keyindex{na}~$p$,
\keyindex{sh}~$p$, \keyindex{dfl}~$p$ and \keyindex{dsh}~$p$ respectively.

Alternate procedures \keyindex{lfl}, \keyindex{lna}, \keyindex{lsh},
\keyindex{ldfl} and \keyindex{ldsh}
place the same accidentals, but their abscissa is shifted one note head width
on the left. The purpose of this is to avoid collision of accidentals
in a chord with narrow intervals.

 The second way of coding accidentals consists in putting the symbol
\verb|^| (sharp), the symbol \verb|_| (flat), the symbol \verb|=| (natural), the
symbol \verb|>| (double sharp), or the symbol \verb|<| (double
flat) within the coding of the note, e.g.: \verb|\qb{^g}| yields a
$G\sharp$. This may very well be combined with collective coding, e.g.:
\verb|\qu{ac^d}|.

 Two sizes are available for accidentals. They revert to the small
version when notes are supposed to be too close to each other. These two
sizes can be forced by coding \keyindex{bigfl}, \keyindex{bigsh}, etc., or
\keyindex{smallfl}, \keyindex{smallsh}, etc. If one does not want to have any
small accidentals, then one can declare \keyindex{bigaccid} (conversely
\keyindex{smallaccid} or \keyindex{varaccid} -- the latter restoring variable
sizes).

 Small accidentals can also be put \ital{above} the note
heads. This is done using \keyindex{uppersh}~$p$, \keyindex{upperna}~$p$ or
\keyindex{upperfl}~$p$:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\uppersh l\qa l\enotes
\NOtes\upperna m\qa m\enotes
\NOtes\upperfl l\qa l\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
 It also possible to introduce \ital{\ixem{cautionary accidental}s} on a
score, i.e.\ small size accidentals between parentheses. This done by preceding
the name of the accidental keyword by a \verb|c|,\label{cautionary}
 e.g.~by coding \keyindex{cfl}~$p$ to get a cautionary flat.
 Available cautionary accidentals are \keyindex{csh}, \keyindex{cfl}, \keyindex{cna},
\keyindex{cdfl} and \keyindex{cdsh}, which give:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\csh g\qa g\enotes
\NOtes\cfl h\qa h\enotes
\NOtes\cna i\qa i\enotes
\NOtes\cdfl j\qa j\enotes
\NOtes\cdsh k\qa k\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent
Besides, the distance between note and accidental is influenced by

\keyindex{accshift}\verb|=|\ital{any \TeX\ dimension}

\noindent
positive values shift to left, negative to right, default is \verb|0pt|.
 \section{Transposition and octaviation}
An important feature is the existence of a special register
\keyindex{transpose} the normal value of which is 0. If you say

\verb|\transpose=3|

\noindent all subsequent pitches specified by
upper or lower case letters\footnote{Pitches specified with figures are
absolute and not transposed.} will be transposed 3 positions. If you set
\keyindex{transpose} to 7 you may write your music one octave below its final
pitch. Thus, you can define \ital{octaviation} macros like

\verb|\def\soqu#1{\zq{#1}{\transpose=7 \qu{#1}}}|

\noindent to build quarter note octaves in a single call. Note
that the octaviated note is coded within braces so that the transposition
is only local.

 \ital{Octaviation}\index{octaviation} can also be performed in another
way, namely using special codes to transpose by multiples of 7 intervals.
For example \verb|\qu{'ab}| is equivalent to \verb|\qu{hi}| and
\verb|\qu{`kl}| is equivalent to \verb|\qu{de}|. It should be
emphasized here that the \verb|'| (\itxem{acute accent}) and the \verb|`|
(\itxem{grave accent}) have cumulative effects, so that \verb|\qu{''A'A}|
is equivalent to \verb|\qu{ah}| and that the \verb|\transpose|
parameter is only reset to its initial value (not necessarily zero) when
changing staff or instrument (i.e. \| or \verb|&|) or at \verb|\enotes|.
 Since this may be confusing, it is useful to use the \verb|!| prefix
to reset the \verb|\transpose| register explicitely to the value it had
when entering \verb|\notes|\footnote{This value is saved in another
register named \keyindex{normaltranspose}.}. Thus \verb|\qu{!a'a}| always
gives the note \verb|a| and its upper octave \verb|h| \ital{shifted by the
value of {\Bslash transpose} at the beginning of the current} \noindent
\verb|\notes...\enotes| group (or \verb|\Notes...\enotes|,
etc.) whatever the number of previous grave and acute accents occurring
inbetween.
 \subsection{Typical piano octave transposition}
 \subsubsection{Local octave transposition of fixed length}
\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTEs\octfinup{10}{3.5}\qu a\qu b\qu c\qu d\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent can be coded as
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOTEs\octfinup{10}{3.5}\qu a\qu b\qu c\qu d\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}\zkeyindex{octfinup}
\noindent that is, the dashed line extends 3.5$\times${\Bslash noteskip}.
Conversely, lower octaviation can also be coded, for example:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTEs\octfindown{-5}{2.6}\ql j\ql i\ql h\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent which is coded as
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOTEs\octfindown{-5}{2.6}\ql j\ql i\ql h\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}\zkeyindex{octfindown}
If a more sophisticated posting is wanted, this can be achieved refefining
the macro \keyindex{octnumber}, e.g.:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTEs\def\octnumber{\ppffsixteen8$^{va}$}\octfinup{10}3\qu c\qu d\qu e\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent whose coding is
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOTEs\def\octnumber{\ppffsixteen8$^{va}$}\octfinup{10}3\qu c\qu d\qu e\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\noindent or

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTEs\def\octnumber{\ppffsixteen8$^{va\,bassa}$}\octfindown{-5}4\ql l\ql k\ql j\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOTEs\def\octnumber{\ppffsixteen8$^{va\,bassa}$}%
  \octfindown{-5}4\ql l\ql k\ql j\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

\subsubsection{Long or variable range octave transposition}
Long range octave transpositions are better handled using
\keyindex{Ioctfinup},
\keyindex{Ioctfindown} and
\keyindex{Toctfin} whose effect extends over line breaks.

{\Bslash Ioctfinup}~$np$ starts an octave transposition of reference number
$n$ (with $0\le n<6\equiv$\keyindex{maxoctlines}) dashed line at pitch $p$
(usually $p>10$ but it can also be an alphabetic pitch specification),
{\Bslash Ioctfindown}~$np$ starts a lower octave transposition at pitch $p$
(usually $p<-2$), and both extend until terminated with {\Bslash toctfin}. The
difference between {\Bslash Ioctfinup}~$n$ and {\Bslash Ioctfindown}~$n$ is
the relative position of the ``8'' figure with respect to the dashed line, and
the sense of the terminating hook (note that {\Bslash Ioctfinup} has a hook
under the dashed line, and conversely).

For the sake of backward compatibility, \keyindex{ioctfinup} is equivalent to
\verb|\Ioctfinup 0| and \keyindex{ioctfindown} is equivalent to
\verb|\Ioctfindown 0|.
For example:

\medskip
 \begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs12
\setclef1{6000}
%
\startextract
\notes\wh{CDEFGH}|\wh{cde}\Ioctfinup 1p\wh{fgh}\enotes
\bar
\notes\Ioctfindown 2A\wh{IJKLMN}|\wh{ijklmn}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\wh{NMLKJI}|\wh{nmlkji}\Toctfin1\enotes
\bar
\Notes\wh{HGFED}\Toctfin2\wh C|\wh{hgfedc}\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
whose coding is
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs12
\setclef1{6000}
%
\startextract
\notes\wh{CDEFGH}|\wh{cde}\Ioctfinup 1p\wh{fgh}\enotes
\bar
\notes\Ioctfindown 2A\wh{IJKLMN}|\wh{ijklmn}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\wh{NMLKJI}|\wh{nmlkji}\Toctfin1\enotes
\bar
\Notes\wh{HGFED}\Toctfin2\wh C|\wh{hgfedc}\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 %\check


%\begin{changebar}

 The elevation of octaviation lines may be raised/lowered using
\keyindex{Liftoctline}~$n$~$p$ where $n$ is the reference number of the
 wanted ocave line, and $n$ a number (possibly negative) number of
\verb|\internote| by which the dashed line should be lifted. This is
particularly useful when octaviation lines last several systems and need to be
lifted in the systems occuring farther than the initiation.

%\end{changebar}

 \subsection{Transposition of accidentals}
 The above processes indeed change the vertical position of the note heads
and associated symbols (note stems, accents and beams) but they do not take
care of the necessary changes of accidentals when transposing, i.e. the fact
that an $F\sharp$ occurring with a zero signature should become a $B\natural$
when transposing from the tonality of $C$ major to $F$ major where the normal
$B$ is the $B\flat$. Since the intent of the composer is not obvious -- he
may want to shift a group of notes within the same tonality or conversely to
transpose it in another tonality -- this is not done automatically. Thus the
\keyindex{sh}, \keyindex{fl}, \keyindex{na}, \keyindex{dsh} and
\keyindex{dfl} symbols \ital{are not affected} by a change of the
\keyindex{transpose} register.

 But the composer/typesetter may ask \musixtex\ to do that work. In this
case, he should code \keyindex{relativeaccid}. In that case, a \verb|\sh|
command means that the corresponding pitch\footnote{The musical output note,
not the typesetting position.} has to be raised by \ital{one half pitch}
with respect to its normal value \ital{according to the current signature}.
Thus \verb|\sh b| (using \keyindex{relativeaccid}) means a $B\sharp$ if the
signature is zero or positive, and a $B\natural$ if it is negative. The same
logic applies for all accidentals using \keyindex{relativeaccid}.

In the same way, the compact codes \verb|^|, \verb|_|, \verb|=| are normally
not affected by transposition and signatures, but their behaviour will be
changed by saying \keyindex{relativeaccid} and reset by
\keyindex{absoluteaccid} (the default situation)\footnote{Note that the
behaviour of {\Bslash sh}, {\Bslash na} and {\Bslash fl} with \musixtex\
corresponds to the behaviour of  {\Bslash Sh}, {\Bslash Na} and {\Bslash Fl}
with \musictex+{musictrp.tex}. But the {\tt musixcpt.tex} file forces the same
behaviour as \musixtex\ in that respect, see page \pageref{compatibility}.}.

 Although \ital{relative accidental coding} is an easy and safe way of
coding \ital{transposable} scores, care should be exercised in getting rid
of the habit of saying \verb|\na b| to raise the pitch of a $B$ when the
tonality is $F$ major (i.e. with \keyindex{setsign$n$}\verb|=-1| or
\keyindex{generalsignature}\verb|{-1}|). An example of sophisticated
transposition is given in the score \verb|souvenir.tex| (which \verb|\input|s
\verb|souvenix.tex|).

 %\check

\section{Slurs and ties}
The slurs and ties provided by \musixtex\ can be divided into two categories:
\label{simpleslur}
\begin{itemize}
   \item Those where the complete slur symbol is composed of a single
   character from one of the slur fonts, and
   \item those where the slur symbol is composed three discrete
   characters, to form the beginning, middle and end of the slur.
\end{itemize}
The former are called \ital{simple slurs} and the latter are called
\ital{compound slurs}. To some extent the division between the two is
invisible to the user, in that a number of the macros described below will
select between the two types automatically. However, other macros are
provided to
enable simple slurs to be specified. Note that slurs of both types must be
coded within the pair \verb|\notes...\enotes|.
 \subsection{General slur coding}
This section describes the usual method of slur coding, where the
choice between simple or compound slurs is made automatically.
In this case, slurs are initiated and terminated by separate macros,
as is the case for beams.
 \subsubsection{Slur initiation}
The slur must be initiated {\em before}
the spacing note at which the slur begins, and terminated {\em before} the
note at which the slur ends. The simplest slur initiation macro is


\keyindex{isluru}~$np$

\noindent which initiates an upper slur, with reference
number $n$, beginning at pitch $p$. The starting point of the slur is
centred above an imaginary quarter note head at pitch $p$.
As for beams, the reference number $n$ takes values from 0 to 5, or
0 to 8 if \ttxem{musixadd.tex} is included.
Similarly, \keyindex{islurd}~$np$ initiates a lower slur.
These slurs are terminated by coding
\keyindex{tslur}~$np$ where $n$ is the reference number and $p$ is the
termination pitch. To illustrate with a simple example, the following
passage

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\islurd0g\qu g\tslur0{'c}\qu c\en
\Notes\isluru0{'e}\ibl0e{-2}\qb0{edc}\tslur0b\tqb0b\en
\bar
\NOtes\islurd0{'a}\qu a\tslur0{`f}\qu f\en
\NOTes\hu g\en
\endextract
\end{music}

\noindent was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\NOtes\islurd0g\qu g\tslur0{'c}\qu c\en
\Notes\isluru0{'e}\ibl0e{-2}\qb0{edc}\tslur0b\tqb0b\en
\bar
\NOtes\islurd0{'a}\qu a\tslur0{`f}\qu f\en
\NOTes\hu g\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

Other macros are provided to change the starting and ending point of the slur
in relation to the initial and final notes. Thus, \keyindex{issluru}~$np$
initiates a ``short'' upper slur suitable for linking notes involved in chords. The
starting point is shifted to the right, and is vertically aligned with the
centre of an imaginary quarter note head at pitch $p$. If a lower short slur
is wanted, one should use \keyindex{isslurd}~$np$.


Sometimes, busy scores call for slurs which are vertically aligned with the
ends of note stems rather than note heads. These ``beam'' slurs --- so called
because the slur is written at usual beam height --- are provided by the
macros \keyindex{ibsluru}~$np$ and \keyindex{ibslurd}~$np$. These macros
initiate slurs raised or lowered by the current stem height to accommodate
stems or beams above or below.
 %\check

 \subsubsection{Slur termination}\label {slurtermin}
Termination of slurs can be achieved in two ways. First, macros matching
each of the initialization macros are provided, as shown below.\\
\begin{center}
  \begin{tabular}{ll}
    Initiation                             &   Termination \\
    \hline
    \keyindex{isluru},  \keyindex{islurd}  & \keyindex{tslur}  \\
    \keyindex{issluru}, \keyindex{isslurd} & \keyindex{tsslur} \\
    \keyindex{ibsluru}                     & \keyindex{tbsluru}\\
    \keyindex{ibslurd}                     & \keyindex{tbslurd}\\
    \hline
  \end{tabular} \end{center} These specific termination macros enable slurs
started in one way to be terminated in another. For example, a slur beginning
as a ``beam'' slur may be terminated as a normal slur. This would be achieved
using the macro pair \verb|\ibslur...\tslur|.
 \subsubsection{Ties} The coding of \itxem{ties} follows from the above
discussion as a special case of slurs, i.e. when there is no pitch change.
Upper ties are initiated by \keyindex{itieu}~$np$ which starts an upper tie of
reference number $n$ at pitch $p$.
Lower ties are initiated by \keyindex{itied}~$np$ which starts an lower tie of
reference number $n$ at pitch $p$.

The starting position of the tie is the same as \verb|\issluru| and
\verb|\isslurd| respectively. The tie is terminated by coding
\keyindex{ttie}~$n$.

Some simple examples of slurs and ties are illustrated below.

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTes\isluru0g\hl g\tslur0h\hl h\en
\NOTes\islurd0c\issluru1g\zh{ce}\hu g\tslur0d\tsslur1h\zh{df}\hu h\en
\NOTes\ibsluru0g\islurd1g\hu g\tubslur0h\hu h\en
\NOTes\itieu0k\hl k\ttie0\tdbslur1f\hl k\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent This was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTes\isluru0g\hl g\tslur0h\hl h\en
\NOTes\islurd0c\issluru1g\zh{ce}\hu g\tslur0d\tsslur1h\zh{df}\hu h\en
\NOTes\ibsluru0g\islurd1g\hu g\tubslur0h\hu h\en
\NOTes\itieu0k\hl k\ttie0\tdbslur1f\hl k\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \subsubsection{Short ties} Usual music coding makes ties not different of
slurs, i.e. a tie is typed exactly like a slur linking two notes of same pitch.
However, this traditional way of doing has two the drawback:
 \begin{itemize}
  \item in some special cases, a slur might be confused with a tie and
conversely,
  \item chord ties cannot be implemented with the slur starting above or below
the note, but only starting just right of the noetead and finishing just left
of the other note head.
 \end{itemize}
  This can be done using \verb|\issluru| (\ref{slurtermin}, p.
\pageref{slurtermin}) or \keyindex{itenu}~$np$, \keyindex{itenl}~$np$ for tie
initiation, and \keyindex{tten}~$n$ to terminate it. As an example:

 \begin{music}
 \startextract
 \NOTes\itenl0d\itenl1e\itenu2g\itenu3j\zh{ceg}\hu j\enotes
 \bar
 \NOTes\tten0\tten1\tten2\tten3\zh{ceg}\hu j\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
 \noindent was coded as:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \begin{music}
 \startextract
 \NOTes\itenl0d\itenl1e\itenu2g\itenu3j\zh{ceg}\hu j\enotes
 \bar
 \NOTes\tten0\tten1\tten2\tten3\zh{ceg}\hu j\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 %\check


 \subsubsection{Slur limitations}
  The vertical gap between slur initiation and slur termination is limited to
16\verb|\Internote|. Thus exceedingly ascending slurs lead to unfortunate
results, such as~:

 \begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
\startextract\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0j\ql j\enotes
  \bar\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0n\ql n\enotes\endextract

\startextract\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0s\ql s\enotes
  \bar\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0z\ql z\enotes\endextract
 \end{music}
 whose coding was:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0j\ql j\enotes
  \bar\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0n\ql n\enotes\endextract

\startextract\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0s\ql s\enotes
  \bar\NOTes\multnoteskip3\isluru0c\ql c\tslur0z\ql z\enotes\endextract
 \end{music}
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 Besides, tentative slurs of excessive slope may also yield unexpected shapes,
such as:
 \begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
\startextract\NOTes\isluru0c\ql c\enotes\notes\tslur0j\ql j\enotes
  \bar\NOTes\isluru0c\ql c\enotes\notes\tslur0n\ql n\enotes
 \NOTes\isluru0c\ql c\enotes\notes\tslur0s\ql s\enotes
 \bar\NOTes\isluru0c\ql c\enotes\notes\tslur0z\ql z\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \subsection{Dotted slurs} Compound and simple slurs (\ref{simpleslur},
p.\pageref{simpleslur}) may be drawn dotted\footnote{Thanks to Werner {\sc
Icking}.} specifying \keyindex{dotted} just before slur  initiation.

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\dotted\islurd0g\qu g\tslur0{'c}\qu c\en
\Notes\dotted\isluru0{'e}\ibl0e{-2}\qb0{edc}\tslur0b\tqb0b\en\bar
\NOtes\dotted\slur{'a}{`f}d1\qu{'a`f}\en
\NOTes\hu g\en
\endextract
\end{music}

\noindent This was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\NOtes\dotted\islurd0g\qu g\tslur0{'c}\qu c\en
\Notes\dotted\isluru0{'e}\ibl0e{-2}\qb0{edc}\tslur0b\tqb0b\en\bar
\NOtes\dotted\slur{'a}{`f}d1\qu{'a`f}\en
\NOTes\hu g\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \subsection{*Modifying slur properties}
Several macros are provided to modify the shape of slurs already initiated.
These macros must be coded before the slur termination. Note that only
compound slurs can be modified. Hence, calling any modification macro forces
the slur type to be compound.
 \subsubsection{*Changing the rise or fall}
 By default, the arch of a slur rises and falls from its original height by
three times the vertical note spacing. This can be changed using the macro
\keyindex{midslur}~$h$ where $h$ is the revised vertical displacement. For
example, \verb|\midslur{6}| coded before \verb|\tslur| causes an upper slur to
rise to a maximum height of \verb|6\internote| above the starting position.
Note that \verb|\midslur| must be coded {\em immediately} before the slur
termination (eg, \verb|\tslur|). Coding \verb|\midslur| before setting a
simple slur causes problems and should be avoided.\\[20pt]

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\isluru0g\ql g\en
\notes\tslur0g\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\isluru0g\ql g\en
\notes\midslur7\tslur0g\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\isluru2g\ql g\en
\notes\midslur{11}\tslur2g\ql g\en
\endextract
\end{music}
This was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\isluru0g\ql g\en
\notes\tslur0g\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\isluru0g\ql g\en
\notes\midslur7\tslur0g\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\isluru2g\ql g\en
\notes\midslur{11}\tslur2g\ql g\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \subsubsection{*Changing the curvature}
The degree of curvature depends primarily on the initial and terminal
gradient of the slur, relative to its mean slope. The macro
\keyindex{curve}~$hij$ allows these to be modified. The first parameter $h$
is the vertical deviation as for \verb|\midslur| described above. The second
parameter $i$ sets the initial gradient, while the third parameter $j$ sets
the
final gradient. The latter parameters are defined as the horizontal distance
required to attain maximum vertical deviation. Thus smaller numbers for $i$
and $j$ lead to more extreme gradients.
The default setting is \verb|\curve344|. Hence, coding \verb|\curve322|
doubles the initial and final gradient relative to the default.
As with \verb|\midslur|, \verb|\curve| must be coded {\em immediately} before
the slur termination.
Likewise, coding \verb|\curve| before
a simple slur causes problems and should be avoided.

The example below illustrates the use of \verb|\curve| more clearly.



\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\itieu0g\ql g\en
\notes\ttie0\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\itieu1g\ql g\en
\notes\curve 322\ttie1\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\itieu2g\ql g\en
\notes\curve 111\ttie2\ql g\en
\endextract
\end{music}
This was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\itieu0g\ql g\en
\notes\ttie0\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\itieu1g\ql g\en
\notes\curve 322\ttie1\ql g\en
\endextract
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip8\itieu2g\ql g\en
\notes\curve 111\ttie2\ql g\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 %\check



 \subsubsection{*Breaking slurs across a line}
Two macros are provided to control the behaviour of slurs which extend across
line breaks. Normally, the part of the slur before the line break is
treated as a tie.  This can be changed using \keyindex{breakslur}~$np$,
which sets the termination height of
the broken slur at the line break to pitch $p$, for slur reference number $n$.

After the line break, the slur is normally resumed at the initial pitch
reference, the one coded in \verb|\islur|. To change this, the macro
\keyindex{Liftslur}~$np$ may be used. Here $n$ is again the slur reference
number and $p$ is the change in height relative to the initialization height.
This macro is normally used following line breaks, in which case it is best
coded using the \verb|\atnextline| macro. For example, coding
\verb|\def\atnextline{\Liftslur06}| raises the continuation of slur zero
by \verb|6\internote| relative to its initialization height.

These macros are illustrated by the following example.
%%
% Example
%%
 %\check

 \subsubsection{*Inverting slur termination}
Occasionally in keyboard works one needs to begin a slur in one
stave but end it in another. This can be done using the macro
\keyindex{invertslur}~$n$ which is best described by reference to the example
shown below.

% Finding the final pitch is try and error, sorry, no way out.

\begin{music}
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1\bass
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip5\isluru0a\ql a\en
\notes\invertslur0\curve311\tslur0g|\qu d\en
\NOtes\multnoteskip{10}\isluru0a\ql a\en
\notes\invertslur0\curve333\tslur0g|\qu d\en
\endextract
\end{music}
This was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1{\bass}
\startextract
\NOtes\multnoteskip5\isluru0a\ql a\en
\notes\invertslur0\curve311\tslur0g|\qu d\en
\NOtes\multnoteskip{10}\isluru0a\ql a\en
\notes\invertslur0\curve333\tslur0g|\qu d\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \begin{remark}
 Slur inversion is achieved at a place where its slope ise zero~; therefore it
only works with ascending slurs started with \verb|\isluru|, and with
descending slurs started with \verb|\islurd|. Otherwise no horizontal place
can be found and the result is erratic.

 This second situation can be solved manually, stopping the slur at a
reasonable place with \verb|\tslur| and restarting in the other sense at the
same place. Stopping and restarting obviously refer to virtual note pitches (a
vertical position without actual note) which should be adjusted to have the
minimum discontinuity.
 \end{remark}

 To make this drawing easier, three commands have been provided:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \keyindex{Tslurbreak}$np$ stops slur number $n$ exactly at pitch $p$,
not above or below the virtual note head.
 \item \keyindex{Islurubreak}$np$ restarts an upper slur at the same position,
not above a virtual note head.
 \item \keyindex{Islurdbreak}$np$ restarts an lower slur at the same position,
not below a virtual note head.
 \end{itemize}
 Thus, the following pattern

 \begin{music}
\setclef1\treble
\startextract
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\isluru0a\ql a\en
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\Tslurbreak0d\Islurdbreak0d\sk\en
\Notes\tslur0h\qu h\en
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\islurd0a\ql a\en
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\Tslurbreak0d\Islurubreak0d\sk\en
\Notes\tslur0h\qu h\en
\endextract
\end{music}
was coded as
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \begin{music}
\setclef1\treble
\startextract
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\isluru0a\ql a\en
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\Tslurbreak0d\Islurdbreak0d\sk\en
\Notes\tslur0h\qu h\en
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\islurd0a\ql a\en
\NOTes\multnoteskip 3\Tslurbreak0d\Islurubreak0d\sk\en
\Notes\tslur0h\qu h\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\end{verbatim}\end{quote} 

 

 
 \subsection{Simple slurs}
Simple slurs and ties have the advantage
of optimal aesthetics and simple coding, but are limited in length to 68pt
for slurs and 220pt for
ties. Also, the maximum vertical extent of simple slurs is 8 times the
internote spacing, and the slurs may not extend across a line break.
Despite all these limitations, simple slurs are extremely useful in many
applications where the slurs are short and contained within a bar.

Simple slurs extend to the right of the note immediately following.
Hence they must be coded {\em before} the note at which the slur begins.
The primary macro call is
\keyindex{slur}~$p_1p_2sl$
where $p_1$ and $p_2$ are respectively the initial and final pitches,
$s$ is the sense, either {\tt u} or {\tt d}, and $l$ is the length,
in units of the current value of {\tt noteskip}.
Thus, thirds slured in pairs can be coded:

 %\check

\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\NOtes\slur ced1\qu{ce}\en
\NOtes\slur dfd1\qu{df}\en
\NOtes\slur egd1\qu{eg}\en
\NOtes\slur{'e}cu1\ql{ec}\en
\NOtes\slur{'d}bu1\ql{db}\en
\NOtes\slur{'c}au1\ql{ca}\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
which yields:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\slur ced1\qu{ce}\en
\NOtes\slur dfd1\qu{df}\en
\NOtes\slur egd1\qu{eg}\en
\NOtes\slur{'e}cu1\ql{ec}\en
\NOtes\slur{'d}bu1\ql{db}\en
\NOtes\slur{'c}au1\ql{ca}\en
\endextract
\end{music}
%%
Similarly, ties may be set using
\keyindex{tie}~$psl$ where $p$ is the (single) pitch, and the other
parameters are as described above.

Variants on these macros are provided to change the slur length
and vertical offset relative to the starting note, as follows.
\begin{itemize}
  \item \keyindex{sslur}~$p_1p_2sl$, which sets a `short' slur,
        designed for the case when a slur is required to link notes which
        form part of a chord (see \verb|\isslur| above).
        The macro \keyindex{stie}~$psl$ sets analagous ties.
%!  \item \keyindex{bslur}~$p_1p_2sl$, which sets a `beam' slur, raised or
%!        lowered so that the slur links the ends of note stems rather than
%!        note heads.
\end{itemize}
 %\check

 \subsection{Restrictions}
Generation of some of the slur fonts is problematic for \MF.
In particular, the long ties tend to exceed \MF's
maximum dimension for high resolution printers. However, for normal 300 dpi
printers there is no problem. A solution to this limitation is planned
for Postscript\raise1.5ex\hbox{\small\copyright} printers using
DVIPS \verb|\special| commands.

\section{Bars}
 \subsection{Bars and spacing}
 Ordinary \ital{bars} are coded using the macro \keyindex{bar}. Its drawback
is that it does not differ from \verb|\bar| which is already defined in
\TeX's mathematical mode. \index{bar (original meaning)@{\Bslash bar}
\ital{(original meaning)}} Therefore, inside \verb|\startpiece...\endpiece|
\ital{our} \verb|\bar| means a musician \ital{bar}\footnote{\ital{Mesure} in
French, \ital{Takt} in German.} and outside, it keeps its original meaning.
If you \ital{really} need the original \verb|\bar| inside, you can say
\verb|\endcatcodesmusic...\bar...\catcodesmusic|.
 %\check

 \subsection{Bar numbering}
Unless otherwise specified, \index{bar numbering}bars are
numbered. This is a good means of finding errors provided that the \musixtex\
user has put comments in his source text recording the (expected) bar number.
However, this can look unpleasant for final outputs, since the habit is to
number bars only each other five or ten bars. This is not a serious problem
since the frequency of bar numbering is defined as:

 \verb|\def|\keyindex{freqbarno}\verb|{1}|

If you replace the {\tt1} by {\tt5}, bar numbering will occur each other five
bars. You can also inhibit any bar number\footnote{default inside this manual}
printing by telling:

\keyindex{nobarnumbers}

\noindent If you want to restore bar numbering after \verb|\nobarnumbers|,
you can say

\keyindex{barnumbers}

 The bar counter is also accessible, its name is \keyindex{barno}.
You can change it without any dramatic consequence.

Sometimes there is need for to start with a \verb|\barno| value which differs
from 1. Perhaps the piece starts with an \ital{upbeat}, then you can code

\keyindex{startbarno}\verb|=0|

\noindent in front of \verb|\startpiece|; or you may want to typeset only an
excerpt starting for example with bar number
198, then you can code \verb|\startbarno=198|. Pay attention because
saying \verb|\startbarno=|$n$ has a global meaning. So if you want to
\verb|\input| several pieces whose starting bar numbers differ, you have to
adjust the value of \verb|\startbarno| each time.\label{startbarno}

 %\check

The best compromise between information of the bar number and a pleasant
lookout is the command \keyindex{systemnumbers} which draws the bar numbers
only at the left top of every system (or staff? then the command will
be renamed to \verb|\staffnumbers| or \verb|\staffbarnumbers|).

You can influence the height of the system numbers by coding

\verb|\def|\keyindex{raisebarno}\verb|{|\ital{any \TeX~dimension}\verb|}|

\noindent whose default is set to \verb|4\internote| to fit above
a violin clef. You can influence its horizontal position with

\verb|\def|\keyindex{shiftbarno}\verb|{|\ital{any \TeX~dimension}\verb|}|

\noindent which default value is \verb|0pt|. If you don't like the box around
the bar number or its font, you can redefine the macro which sets the system
bar number; its default is

\verb|\def|\keyindex{writebarno}%
  \verb|{\boxit{\eightbf\the\barno\barnoadd}}|

 \noindent where \keyindex{boxit} is a utility macro provided by \musixtex{}
whose purpose is to enclose its argument in a \raise-\boxitsep\hbox{\boxit{box}}.


\medskip
\begin{music}
\let\extractline\hbox
\startbarno=36
\hbox to \hsize{%
\hss
  \raise20pt\hbox{(a) }%
  \systemnumbers\startextract
    \Notes\wh g\en
  \zendextract
\hss
  \def\writebarno{\tenrm\the\barno\barnoadd}%
  \def\raisebarno{2\internote}%
  \def\shiftbarno{2.5\Interligne}%
  \raise20pt\hbox{(b) }%
  \systemnumbers\startextract
    \Notes\wh g\en
  \zendextract
\hss
  \def\writebarno{\llap{\tenbf\the\barno\barnoadd}}%
  \def\raisebarno{2\internote}%
  \def\shiftbarno{1.3\Interligne}%
  \raise20pt\hbox{(c) }%
  \systemnumbers\startextract
    \Notes\wh g\en
  \zendextract
\hss}
\end{music}
which was coded as
\begin{itemize}
 \item[(a)] (default)
 \item[(b)]
  \begin{verbatim}
\def\writebarno{\tenrm\the\barno\barnoadd}%
\def\raisebarno{2\internote}%
\def\shiftbarno{2.5\Interligne}%
  \end{verbatim}
 \item[(c)]
  \begin{verbatim}
\def\writebarno{\llap{\tenbf\the\barno\barnoadd}}%
\def\raisebarno{2\internote}%
\def\shiftbarno{1.3\Interligne}%
  \end{verbatim}
\end{itemize}
If the previous line does not stop with a bar rule to the next system bar number
is added the \keyindex{writezbarno} whose default setting is the lower
character {\tt'a'}. If you want a {\tt'+}' instead, you can say

\verb|\def|\keyindex{writezbarno}\verb|{+}|

 Besides, you can change the font and anything in the format of current bar
numbers by changing the original definition of the macro
\keyindex{writethebarno} or the font in \keyindex{fontbarno}, where the
defaults are:

  \verb|\def\writethebarno{\fontbarno\the\barno\kernm\qn@width}|
  
  \verb|\def\fontbarno{\it}|


  \noindent For example:

  \medskip
\begin{music}\barnumbers
\parindent0pt\startpiece
\Notes\Dqbu gh\Dqbl jh\en
\notes\Dqbbu fg\Dqbbl hk\en\bar
\Notes\Tqbu ghi\Tqbl mmj\en
\def\fontbarno{\bf}%
\notes\Tqbbu fgj\Tqbbl njh\en\bar
\Notes\Qqbu ghjh\Qqbl jifh\en\bar
\notes\Qqbbu fgge\Qqbbl jhgi\en\endpiece
\end{music}
\noindent which was simply coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}\barnumbers
\Notes\Dqbu gh\Dqbl jh\en
\notes\Dqbbu fg\Dqbbl hk\en\bar
\Notes\Tqbu ghi\Tqbl mmj\en
\def\fontbarno{\bf}%
\notes\Tqbbu fgj\Tqbbl njh\en\bar
\Notes\Qqbu ghjh\Qqbl jifh\en\bar
\notes\Qqbbu fgge\Qqbbl jhgi\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 %\check



 %\check

\noindent Besides, you can suppress the messages of bar numbers on
\verb|stdout| (normally screen) with \keyindex{nobarmessage}. In the same way,
you can suppress the messages abour new lines (new systems) with
\keyindex{nolinemessages}.
 %\check

 \subsection{Full and instrument divided bars}
Normally, bars (as well as double bars, final bars and repeat bars) are
drawn as a continuous line, starting for the bottom of the lower staff of the
lower instrument, and ending at the top of the upper staff of the upper
instrument. However, one may want to have discontinuous bars, that is, one
continuous bar for all the staffs of a unique instrument. This is done by
issuing the command \keyindex{sepbarrules}. An example of this is given in the
{\tt ANGESCAO} (or {\tt ANGESCAM}) example; it has also been used in the
example of section \ref{avemaria}.

 The initial situation can be forced or restored by \keyindex{stdbarrules}. In
the extension library are some more types of bar rules, mainly for very old
music, see \ref{otherbars}.

 \subsection{Instruments with no coherent bar division}

 In some special scores with several instruments, it may happen that distinc
instruments, not only have different meters (e.g. 2/4 and 6/8 to avoid
printing triolet codes for some instrument), but also have bar lines not
synchronized. Obviously, this can be implemented \ital{{\bfseries only if}}
\keyindex{sepbarrules} has been stated. Then, five specific commands can be issued~:

\begin{itemize}
\item\keyindex{hidebarrule} $n$ hides the bar rule for instrument $n$, until
this is changed by \verb|\showbarrule|~$n$.
\item\keyindex{showbarrule} $n$ stops hiding the bar rule for instrument $n$, until
this is changed by \verb|\hidebarrule|~$n$.
\item\keyindex{Hidebarrule} $n$ hides the bar rule for instrument $n$, only
for the next bar.
\item\keyindex{Showbarrule} $n$ exceptionally shows the bar rule for instrument $n$,
and then resets intrument $n$ to \verb|Hidebarrule|.
\item\keyindex{showallbarrules} resets all defined instruments to
\verb|showbarrule|~$n$. This command is automatically inserted with double
bars, final bars and repeats.
\end{itemize}

Thus, the following example~:

\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber3
\setmeter3{{\meterfrac{3}{4}}}
\setmeter2{{\meterfrac{2}{4}}}
\setmeter1{{\meterfrac{3}{8}}}
\nobarnumbers
\sepbarrules

\startextract
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\hidebarrule2\hidebarrule3\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\showbarrule2\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\hidebarrule2\showbarrule3\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\showbarrule2\hidebarrule3\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\hidebarrule2\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\setdoublebar
\bar\hidebarrule3
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\Hidebarrule2\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\message{Showbarrule3 coming}%
\Hidebarrule2\Showbarrule3\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\Hidebarrule2\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\setrightrepeat
\endextract
\end{music}

\noindent was obtained with the following coding
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\instrumentnumber3
\setmeter3{{\meterfrac{3}{4}}}
\setmeter2{{\meterfrac{2}{4}}}
\setmeter1{{\meterfrac{3}{8}}}
\nobarnumbers
\sepbarrules

\startextract
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\hidebarrule2\hidebarrule3\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\showbarrule2\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\hidebarrule2\showbarrule3\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\showbarrule2\hidebarrule3\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\hidebarrule2\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\setdoublebar
\bar\hidebarrule3
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\Hidebarrule2\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\message{Showbarrule3 coming}%
\Hidebarrule2\Showbarrule3\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\bar
\NOtes\pt f\qa f&\qa f&\qa f\en
\Hidebarrule2\bar
\NOtes\multnoteskip{.333}\Tqbu fff&\qa f&\qa f\en
\setrightrepeat
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


\section{Managing the layout of your score}
\subsection{Line and page breaking}\label{linebreak}

Those who usually worked with \musictex\ before must be aware that this has
been deeply changed in \musixtex. All line-breaking decisions\footnote{With
exception of the \musictex\ command {\Bslash autolines}, which is provided in
the file {\tt musixcpt.tex}, see page \pageref{compatibility}.} are done by
the external program \verb|musixflx|. Then you get the most even results when
you insert the fewest \ital{manual} line breaks possible. But sometimes
there is really need for them, e.g. page break should preferably occur when
the musician has one hand free to turn the sheet.

You can force a line break with \keyindex{alaligne} instead of \keyindex{bar}.
In the same way, you can code \keyindex{alapage} to force an \keyindex{eject}
with proper reinitialization of staffs, clefs and signatures.

 %\check

 On the other hand, you may want to forbid line-breaking at a bar,
then you should replace \verb|\bar| with \keyindex{xbar}.

 Conversely, you may want to break a line \ital{not at a bar}\footnote{For
example, you may prefer to turn the page at a place where the pianist has one
hand free, in the middle of a bar.}. This is allowed by \keyindex{zbar}
(optional line break) or forced by \keyindex{zalaligne} or
\keyindex{zalapage}.

The heavy final double bar of a piece is provided by \keyindex{Endpiece} or
\keyindex{Stoppiece}. If you just want to terminate the text with a simple
bar, you say \keyindex{stoppiece} or \keyindex{endpiece}. If you want to
terminate it without a bar, you code \keyindex{zstoppiece}.

 Once you have stopped the score by any of these means, you can restart it
using \keyindex{contpiece}. If you want to restart indenting the next line
(system) by the dimension \keyindex{parindent}, then you should rather use
\keyindex{Contpiece}, which is recommended when changing the
the number of instruments within a single piece.

 However, neither \verb|\contpiece| nor \verb|\Contpiece| can be used if you
change the signature (i.e. using \keyindex{generalsignature}) between
\verb|stoppiece| and \verb|\contpiece|), since the space used by signatures is
not constant and it has to be taken in account, e.g. by some
\keyindex{changecontext}. In that case, you have to restart your score using
\keyindex{startpiece}, which in turn requires you to save \verb|\barno| to its
furtner starting value \verb|\startbarno| if you do not want it reset at 1,
and to manage the instrument names and/or the \verb|\parindent| if necessary.

 If you want the next vertical bar to be a double bar, you have to
declare \keyindex{doublebar} or \keyindex{setdoublebar} before the
\keyindex{bar} (or the \keyindex{stoppiece} or \keyindex{alaligne} or
\keyindex{alapage}) to be marked with a double thin bar. In the same way you
can declare \keyindex{setdoubleBAR} if you want to have a heavy double bar
(the same as \verb|\Stoppiece|) and even \keyindex{setemptybar} to make the
next \verb|\bar| invisible\footnote{These latter features are given for your
information, but they should be used only in case of emergency.}.

 %\check

\subsection{How to manage individual page layout}
\begin{enumerate}
 \item You write your own output routine, which centers the contents in the
middle of the page. Most important are then the values of
\keyindex{stafftopmarg} and \keyindex{staffbotmarg}, because they decide of
the amount of margin between successive systems.
 \item If you say \keyindex{raggedbottom}, the vertical glue is removed and
the score is rather compacted at the top of page.
 \item You change the value of \keyindex{parskip} and say
\keyindex{normalbottom} (which behaves like \LaTeX's \keyindex{flushbottom}
and which is done by default working with \verb|plain.tex|). Then the
vertical space between the staffs is changed to get the first staff on page
on top and the last staff on page to bottom (depends on \keyindex{vsize}).
It might be clever to insert a \keyindex{eject} before the \keyindex{bye}.
\keyindex{musicparskip} set between two systems no extra distance, but the
possibility to increase the distance up to \verb|5\Interligne|.
\end{enumerate}
\noindent
Besides, following values of e.g.~paper size are changed
(only if you \ital{do not} work with \LaTeX) to:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\parindent= 0pt
\hoffset= -15.4mm
\voffset= -10mm
\hsize= 190mm
\vsize= 260mm
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\zkeyindex{parindent}\zkeyindex{hoffset}\zkeyindex{voffset}
\zkeyindex{hsize}\zkeyindex{vsize}

 %\check

\subsection{How to adjust the global line and page layout}\index{page and line
layout (global)}

 Once you have made your whole score, you will probably find out that all
systems (all ``lines'') have a correct layout with nice beams, nice slurs, and
others. But it is likely that:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item The result takes too many or too few pages and you estimate a more or
less compact score would be suitable.
 \item The results takes a convenient number of pages, but the last page
exhibits a widow line or an ugly blank space at the end.
 \end{itemize}

 To solve this, you may revert to two strategies:
 \begin{enumerate}
  \item Explicitely force line and page breaking at the very places you like;
  this can be done using \verb|\alaligne|, \verb|\alapage|, \verb|\zalaligne|
or \verb|\zalapage| commands. This can also be done using the
\verb|\autolines| command imported from \musictex\ and provided in the {\tt
musixcpt.tex} additional file. But this way of doing may result in
unfortunately uneven distribution of the notes in the score, which is therefore
not very smart.
  \item Adapt both the \keyindex{mulooseness} and the global value of
\keyindex{elemskip}: increasing \verb|\mulooseness| (whose default is 0)
increases the total number of systems, and if you are clever you may be able
to fill an integer number of pages. Besides, increasing the stated
\verb|\elemskip| (use \verb|\showthe\elemskip| to find its default value) also
makes note spacing wider, and its advantage is that you can tune it by half a
percent if needed.

\begin{remark} \verb|\elemskip| can be retrieved in both the first and the third
pass (second \TeX-ing pass), but any assignment of a value (a dimension value)
to \verb|\elemskip| will be of no effect at third pass, since it is taken from
the {\tt *.mx2} file yielded by {\tt musixflx}. On the contrary, assigning a
value to \keyindex{noteskip} within \verb|\notes...\enotes| is efficient in
both passes, and cause some weird errors if you mix up scalable and not
scalable dimensions.
 \end{remark}
 \end{enumerate}
 %\check

\section{Changing score attributes}

 As seen before, you can change the signature of the whole set of instruments
by \keyindex{generalsignature}~$n$ where $n>0$ means a number of sharps, $n<0$
means a number of flats. Or, you may prefer to change the signature of only
one or two instruments by the statement:

\keyindex{setsign} $n$\verb|{|$s$\verb|}|

 %\check

\noindent
 where $n$ is the number of the instrument considered, and $s$ its
specific signature. Since you may change simultaneously (with respect to the
score) but consecutively (with respect to your code) the signatures of
several instruments, this change takes place only when you say
\keyindex{changesignature} (within a bar) or \keyindex{changecontext} (after
a single vertical rule) or \keyindex{Changecontext} (after a double vertical
rule) or \keyindex{zchangecontext} (without a bar rule\footnote{Old composers
uses the bar rules very rarely}).

 Normally, changing a signature from flats to sharps or sharps to flats or
reducing the number of sharps/flats will produce the convenient set of
naturals to emphasise what is suppressed. This standard feature can be
temporarily inhibited by the command \keyindex{ignorenats} to be issued before
the next {\Bslash changecontext} or {\Bslash changesignature}.


 In the same way, you may want to change the active clefs.
This is done by

\keyindex{setclef}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}{|$s_1s_2s_3s_4$\verb|}%|

 %\check

\noindent where $r$ is the number of the instrument, $s_1$ specifies the clef
of the lower staff, $s_2$ the clef of the second staff, etc. $s_1=6$ means the
\ital{bass} clef (\ixem{clef de fa} in French), $s_1=0$ means the \ital{violin}
clef (\ixem{clef de sol} in French), $s_1=1$ through $s_1=4$ mean the
\ital{alto} clef (\ixem{clef d'ut} in French) set on first (lower) through
fourth (next to upper line of the staff), $s_1=5$ or $s_1=6$ mean the bass clef
on the third or fourth line respectively.\index{violin clef}\index{bass
clef}\index{alto clef}

 As seen above in the case of signatures, several clefs may be changed at the
same time; thus all the clef changes become operational only when the macro
\keyindex{changeclefs} is coded. Normal usage consists in issuing this
command before the bar, not after (this helps the music player when the
change happens across a line break).
 %\check

 The \verb|\changeclefs| command normally takes some horizontal space to put
one of more clef symbols, but it may happen that you have no notes
immediately before on the staff whose clef is changed. In that case, you can
use \keyindex{zchangeclefs} which performs the same posting, overwritten left on
the last part of the score in that staff. Of course it is your responsibility
to ensure that no notes will collide with the clef change symbols.
 %\check

The \musictex\ problem if a clef change is coded while one or several beams
are pending has been removed in \musixtex. As an enhanced example, we provide
an excerpt of {\sc Brahms}'s Intermezzo op.~117,1 initially coded by Miguel
{\sc Filgueiras}:\index{Brahms, J.@{\sc Brahms, J.}}\medskip

\begin{music}
\setstaffs1{2}
\interstaff{11}
\setclef1\bass % F- and G-clefs
\generalsignature{-3}% 3 flats
\parindent-4mm
\advance\hsize8mm
\startpiece
\qspace\nspace
\Notes\arpeggio E5\ibslurd0o\zq{EI}\qu N%
  \nextstaff\ibl0e{-2}\zq{eg}\qb0l\zq d\qb0k\enotes
\setclef1\treble\zchangeclefs
\nspace
\Notes\tbu0\zq{ce}\qb0j\nextstaff\zq{sn}\cl l\enotes
\notes\curve{-4}22\invertslur0\tslur0t\zq{be}\qu i\nextstaff\zq{sn}\ql l\enotes
\setclef1\bass\changeclefs
\notes\islurd0k\zq E\cu I\nextstaff
  \ibbu1h{-3}\zq{ae}\qb1h\tbu1\zq N\qb1g\enotes
\bar
\Notes\ibu0L{-2}\zq{EI}\qb0M\zqb0L%
  \nextstaff{\stemlength4\zql N}\ibu1f{-2}\qb1f\tbu1\zqb1e\hsk\enotes
\setclef1\treble\changeclefs
\nspace
\Notes\tbu0\zq{Me}\qb0g\nextstaff\zq{ln}\cl s\en
\notes\curve{-4}22\invertslur0\tslur0q\zq{be}\qu i\nextstaff\zq{ln}\ql s\en
\setclef1\bass\changeclefs
\notes\islurd0m\zq G\cu L\nextstaff
  \ibbu1j3\zq c\qb1j\tbu1\zq d\qb1k\enotes
\bar
\Notes\zq G\qu L%
  \nextstaff\ibl0e{-2}\zq{ei}\qb0l\zq d\zqb0k\enotes
\setclef1\treble\changeclefs
\nspace
\Notes\tbu0\zq{ce}\qb0j\nextstaff\zq{sn}\cl l\enotes
\notes\curve{-5}22\invertslur0\tslur0o\zq{be}\qu i\nextstaff\zq{sn}\ql l\enotes
\setclef1\bass \changeclefs
\notes\zq B\cu I\nextstaff\ibsluru0j%
  \ibbu1h{-3}\zq{ae}\qb1h\tbu1\zq N\qb1g\enotes
\bar
\Notes\zq{IL}\ql N\nextstaff\zql b\ibu0i{-2}\qb0i\enotes
\scale{.5}%
\Notes\nextstaff\qb0e\enotes
\Notes\nextstaff\tinynotesize\isluru1f\grcu g\enotes
\scale\normalvalue
\Notes\zq B\cu I\nextstaff\zcl a\tslur1f\tbu0\zq d\qb0f\enotes
\Notesp\zq E\qu I\nextstaff\tslur0e\zq N\zql e\ibu0g6\qbp0e\enotes
\notes\sk\icresc\cu E\sk\zmidstaff\tcresc\nextstaff
  \ibsluru0i\nbbu0\qb0g\zq i\zcl g\qb0i\tbu0\qb0n\tubslur0k\enotes
\endpiece
\end{music}


\noindent The first bar of this excerpt was coded as:

 \begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs1{2}
\interstaff{11}
\setclef1\bass % F- and G-clefs
\generalsignature{-3}% 3 flats
\parindent0pt
\startpiece
\qspace\nspace
\Notes\arpeggio E5\ibslurd0o\zq{EI}\qu N%
  \nextstaff\ibl0e{-2}\zq{eg}\qb0l\zq d\qb0k\enotes
\setclef1\treble\zchangeclefs
\nspace
\Notes\tbu0\zq{ce}\qb0j\nextstaff\zq{sn}\cl l\enotes
\notes\invertslur0\tslur0t\zq{be}\qu i\nextstaff\zq{sn}\ql l\enotes
\setclef1\bass \changeclefs
\notes\islurd0k\zq E\cu I\nextstaff
  \ibbu1h{-3}\zq{ae}\qb1h\tbu1\zq N\qb1g\enotes
\end{music}\end{verbatim}%
\ital{Meter} changes are implemented in following way:

\keyindex{setmeter} $n$%
  \verb|{{|$m1$\verb|}{|$m2$\verb|}{|$m3$\verb|}{|$m4$\verb|}}%|

\noindent
 where $n$ is the number of the instrument, $m1$ specifies the meter
of the lower staff, $m2$ the meter of the second staff, etc. (if necessary!).

Since meter changes
are meaningful only across bars, they are actually taken in account with
\keyindex{changecontext} or \keyindex{Changecontext} or
\keyindex{zchangecontext} or \keyindex{alaligne} or \keyindex{alapage}.

\section{Repeats}

To insert a \ital{repeat bar} you can use following sets of procedures,
namely \keyindex{leftrepeat}, \keyindex{rightrepeat} and
\keyindex{leftrightrepeat}, which are substitute the \keyindex{bar}.
For example:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTes\ha g\enotes
\leftrepeat
\NOTes\ha h\enotes
\leftrightrepeat
\NOTes\ha i\enotes
\rightrepeat
\NOTEs\wh j\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
 \noindent has been coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\NOTes\ha g\enotes
\leftrepeat
\NOTes\ha h\enotes
\leftrightrepeat
\NOTes\ha i\enotes
\rightrepeat
\NOTEs\wh j\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
Special cases are forced line breaks:
if you want to force a new line at a repeat, you should code
respectively:

\begin{quote}
\noindent\keyindex{setrightrepeat}\keyindex{alaligne}\\
\keyindex{setrightrepeat}\keyindex{endpiece}\\
\keyindex{alaligne}\keyindex{leftrepeat}\\
\keyindex{contpiece}\keyindex{leftrepeat}\\
\keyindex{startpiece}\keyindex{leftrepeat}
\end{quote}

\noindent or the combination of two of these in the case of a left/right
repeat.

 A second way of coding consists in saying \keyindex{setleftrepeat},
\keyindex{setrightrepeat} or \keyindex{setleftrightrepeat} before a bar
(\keyindex{bar}), \keyindex{stoppiece} or \keyindex{changecontext}). In
this case, the next single vertical bar will be replaced with the selected
repeat bar. This meets the traditional music typesetting conventions in the
only case of the \ital{right repeat} but, unfortunately, left and left/right
repeats use to behave in a different manner when in the middle of a line and
at a line break.

 \subsection{Specific first and second pass scoring}

\RuleOn
A frequent situation consists in a long part of score repeated two or several
times, but its last few bars are different at first pass and at second pass.
This can be specified by saying
\keyindex{setvolta}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}| before the \keyindex{bar}
beginning the part specific to that first or second part\footnote{The word
``volta'' comes from Italian, it means ``time'' in the sense of ``first
time'', ``second time'' or ``pass'' in that case.}.

 Then, only one bar has a horizontal rule above. No termination command is
needed since termination is implied by the following \verb|\bar| or repeat
symbol. For example:

\medskip \begin{music}
 \parindent0pt \startpiece \addspace\afterruleskip
 \NOTEs\wh a\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh b\en\setvolta{1.-3}\bar \NOTEs\wh c\en\setvolta4\rightrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh d\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh e\en\Endpiece
\end{music}
which was coded as:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \parindent0pt \startpiece \addspace\afterruleskip
 \NOTEs\wh a\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh b\en\setvolta{1.-3}\bar \NOTEs\wh c\en\setvolta4\rightrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh d\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh e\en\Endpiece
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 

 If the music typesetter wants to include more than one bar in the first
pass[es] section and he wants all these to have a continuous line above, then
he can code \keyindex{Setvolta}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}| before the bar he
wants the ``volta'' to begin, and put \keyindex{setendvolta} or
\keyindex{setendvoltabox} before the bar they should end.
\keyindex{setendvoltabox} makes the upper line to be terminated with a
descending hook, symmetrical to the opening small vertical bar.
 

\medskip \begin{music}
 \parindent0pt
 \startpiece
 \addspace\afterruleskip
 \NOTEs\wh a\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh b\en\setvoltabox{1.-3}\bar
 \NOTEs\wh c\en\setvolta4\setendvolta\rightrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh d\en\doublebar
 \NOTEs\wh e\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh f\en\leftrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh g\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh h\en\Setvolta1\bar
 \NOTEs\wh i\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh j\en\Setvolta2\setendvoltabox\rightrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh i\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh h\en\setendvoltabox
 \Endpiece
 \end{music}
 \noindent has been
coded as:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \startpiece \addspace\afterruleskip
 \NOTEs\wh a\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh b\en\setvoltabox{1.-3}\bar
 \NOTEs\wh c\en\setvolta4\setendvolta\rightrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh d\en\doublebar
 \NOTEs\wh e\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh f\en\leftrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh g\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh h\en\Setvolta1\bar
 \NOTEs\wh i\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh j\en\Setvolta2\setendvoltabox\rightrepeat
 \NOTEs\wh i\en\bar
 \NOTEs\wh h\en\setendvoltabox
 \Endpiece
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \zkeyindex{leftrepeat}\zkeyindex{rightrepeat} The
``volta'' symbols are normally set at \verb|4\internote| above the upper line
of the staff and one bar(length?) wide.

 The final down hook is stated, either by \keyindex{setendvoltabox} at the end,
or \keyindex{setvoltabox} at the beginning.

\begin{important}
 You are no more allowed to open \verb|\Setvolta| or \verb|\setvoltabox| whan
another of these multi-bar volta is pending. To re-open a \verb|\Setvolta| at
the ens of another one, you must explicitly order the first one to be closed
at the end of the bar where the second one is opened. Given examples had to be
corrected in order to meet this new safety requirement.

\end{important}

 For the sake of portability, \keyindex{endvolta} is identical ti
\verb|\setendvolta|, and \keyindex{endvoltabox} is identical to
\verb|\setendvoltabox|. Theses changes in the names ar intended to recall that
these commant take effect only at the next bar, repeat or line break.


\RuleOff

 The altitude of the ``volta'' above the upper staff can
be changed, redefining \keyindex{raisevolta}, e.g.:

 \verb|\def\raisevolta{7\internote}|

 \noindent or define it to be any other valid dimension.

 \medskip\noindent{\sl REMARK: the dot after "volta" numbering can be removed,
simply by saying:}

 \verb|\def|\keyindex{voltadot}\verb| {}|

\noindent {\sl and reset by:}

 \verb|\def|\keyindex{voltadot}\verb| {.}|

 \subsection{Large scope repeats and orientation marks}

Large scope repeats have also been provided
with special symbols, namely \keyindex{coda}~$p$, \keyindex{Coda}~$p$,
\keyindex{segno}~$p$, where $p$ specifies the pitch. A bigger symbol is
\keyindex{Segno} with no argument. For example, the following figure

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOtes\segno n\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\coda n\enotes
\NOtes\Segno\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\Coda n\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent has been coded:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\NOtes\segno m\enotes\bar
\NOtes\coda m\enotes
\NOtes\Segno\enotes\bar
\NOtes\Coda m\enotes
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
Orientation marks are set more often above larger orchestral pieces for
easy come together of all instruments for exercise reasons. Often used are
circled or boxed uppercase characters or digits. This can be done with

\keyindex{boxit}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}|~~~or\\
\indent\keyindex{circleit}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}|

\noindent The distance between the box and the including text is influenced by

\keyindex{boxitsep}\verb|=|\ital{any \TeX\ dimension}

\noindent which is setup by default to \verb|3pt|. The usage is recommended
with \keyindex{Uptext}, \keyindex{zcharnote}, \keyindex{zchar} or
\keyindex{ccharnote}.

\subsection{Repeating the last bar}
 This can be done using the symbol \keyindex{duevolte} (often used with
\verb|\centerbar|, see example in \ref{barcentered}, p.
\pageref{barcentered}), e.g.:

\begin{music}
\generalmeter\meterC
\setclef1\bass\setstaffs1{2}
\startextract
\NOtes\sk\sk\pause|\qa{cegj}\en
\bar\NOtes\qa{cdef}|\sk\sk\duevolte\en
\endextract
\end{music}
whose coding is:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\generalmeter\meterC
\setclef1\bass\setstaffs1{2}
\startextract
\NOtes\sk\sk\pause|\qa{cegj}\en
\bar\NOtes\qa{cdef}|\sk\sk\duevolte\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 %\check

\section{Miscellaneous}
 \subsection{Putting anything anywhere}
\noindent Special macros are provided to help the composer to set any \TeX\
text on the staffs. The macro

\keyindex{zcharnote}~$p$\verb|{|text\verb|}|

\noindent
sets the given text with its base line at pitch $p$ of the current staff
(this means it must be coded inside \verb|\notes...\enotes|).
Whatever the length of the text, no spacing occurs.
If you want the possible spilling text to expand on the left rather than
on the right, then you can use \keyindex{lcharnote}.
If you want the possible spilling text centered to current position,
then you can use \keyindex{ccharnote} which causes no space.

The macro \keyindex{zcharnote} is fit for coding special notations like
accents above or below the notes. Also available are \keyindex{zchar},
\keyindex{lchar} and \keyindex{cchar}, which
allows only numbers for pitch, but enables the use of floats too.

To place some text at the mid-position between the two staffs of
a keyboard instrument, you may code:
\begin{quote}
\keyindex{zmidstaff}\verb|{|{\it text}\verb|}%| (to right)\\
\keyindex{lmidstaff}\verb|{|{\it text}\verb|}%| (to left)\\
\keyindex{cmidstaff}\verb|{|{\it text}\verb|}%| (centred)
\end{quote}
\noindent being however
careful, a) to put it inside \verb|\notes...\enotes|, b) to code it in the
text of the lower staff.

 A text to be put above the current staff is introduced by
\keyindex{uptext}\verb|{...}|.
This may however cause some collision with bar
numbering or notes above the staff; it is then wise to use
\keyindex{Uptext}\verb|{...}|
which puts the text two note line distances higher (recommended to post
the tempo).
 \subsection{Fonts} The text fonts loaded by \musixtex\ come in six different
type sizes and three styles. The type sizes are 8\,pt, 10\,pt, 12\,pt, 14\,pt,
17\,pt and 25\,pt, while the three styles are roman, bold and italic. The
three smaller type sizes are available in all three styles, while the larger
three sizes, which are intended for titles, are available only in bold style.
The size selection macros are respectively \keyindex{smalltype},
\keyindex{normtype}, \keyindex{medtype}, \keyindex{bigtype},
\keyindex{Bigtype} ,
\keyindex{BIgtype} and \keyindex{BIGtype}. Following the size selection, the
style may be selected or changed using \keyindex{rm} (roman), \keyindex{bf}
(bold) or \keyindex{it} (italic). If no style selection is made, roman style
will result for the sizes smaller than \verb|\medtype|. For the larger sizes,
style selection is not required since only bold style is provided. Thus,
selection of eight point italic is done using \verb|\smalltype\it|, while
twelve point roman is selected using \verb|\medtype\rm| or simply
\verb|\medtype|. To change between styles while maintaining the same size,
code \verb|\rm|, \verb|\it| or \verb|\bf| as in Plain \TeX. This information
is summarized in the following table.

\begin{center}
  \begin{tabular}{clc}
    \hline
    Size, pt & Size selection    &  Style selection \\
    \hline
     8       & \verb|\smalltype| & \verb|\rm, \bf, \it| \\
    10       & \verb|\normtype|  & \verb|\rm, \bf, \it| \\
    12       & \verb|\medtype|   & \verb|\rm, \bf, \it| \\
    14       & \verb|\bigtype|   & \verb|    (\bf)    | \\
    17       & \verb|\Bigtype|   & \verb|    (\bf)    | \\
    20       & \verb|\BIgtype|   & \verb|    (\bf)    | \\
    25       & \verb|\BIGtype|   & \verb|    (\bf)    | \\
    \hline
  \end{tabular} \end{center} Two other text fonts are provided for dynamic
markings. These are \keyindex{ppffsixteen}, \keyindex{ppfftwenty} and
\keyindex{ppfftwentyfour}, suitable for dynamic markings with staff sizes of
16\,pt, 20\,pt and 24\,pt respectively. The appropriate font for the current
staff size may be selected by coding \keyindex{ppff}.

Naturally other fonts may be loaded by the user if required.
When \musixtex\ is started, the default text font is
ten point roman, equivalent to \verb|\normtype\rm|.
 \subsubsection{Examples}
\begin{center}
  \begin{tabular}{ll}
    \hline
    Size and style  &  Example \\
    \hline
    \verb|\smalltype|    & {\smalltype    small roman}  \\
    \verb|\smalltype\bf| & {\smalltype\bf small bold}   \\
    \verb|\smalltype\it| & {\smalltype\it small italic} \\
    \verb|\normtype|     & {\normtype     normal roman} \\
    \verb|\normtype\bf|  & {\normtype\bf  normal bold}  \\
    \verb|\normtype\it|  & {\normtype\it  normal italic}\\
    \verb|\medtype|      & {\medtype      medium roman} \\
    \verb|\medtype\bf|   & {\medtype\bf   medium bold}  \\
    \verb|\medtype\it|   & {\medtype\it   medium italic}\\
    \verb|\bigtype|      & {\bigtype      big bold}     \\
    \verb|\Bigtype|      & {\Bigtype      Big bold}     \\
    \verb|\BIgtype|      & {\BIgtype      BIg bold}     \\
    \verb|\BIGtype|      & {\BIGtype      BIG bold}     \\
    \verb|\ppffsixteen|  & {\ppffsixteen  pp ff diminuendo}\\
    \verb|\ppfftwenty|   & {\ppfftwenty   pp ff crescendo}\\
    \verb|\ppfftwentyfour|   & {\ppfftwentyfour   pp ff crescendo}\\
    \hline
  \end{tabular}
\end{center}
 \subsection{Metronomic indications}
Metronomic indication deserves a special macro. The mention:

\medskip
\centerline{\def\nbinstruments{0}\metron{\hup}{60}}\smallskip\noindent
is coded by \keyindex{metron}\verb|{\hup}{60}| (normally embedded in
\keyindex{Uptext} which is in turn embedded within \verb|\notes...\enotes|).
 \subsection{Accents}
\begin{itemize}
 \item \keyindex{upz}~$p$ (upper \ital{pizzicato}) to put a dot above a note
head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{lpz}~$p$ (lower \ital{pizzicato}) to put a dot below a note
head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{usf}~$p$ (upper \itxem{sforzando}) to put a $>$ accent above
a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{lsf}~$p$ (lower \itxem{sforzando}) to put a $>$ accent below
a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{ust}~$p$ (upper \itxem{staccato} or \itxem{portato}) to put a
hyphen above a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{lst}~$p$ (lower \ital{staccato} or \ital{portato}) to put a
hyphen below a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{uppz}~$p$ (upper strong \ital{pizzicato}) to put an
apostrophe above a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{lppz}~$p$ (lower strong \ital{pizzicato}) to put a reversed
apostrophe below a note head at pitch $p$.
 \item \keyindex{usfz}~$p$ (upper \ital{sforzato}) to put a
`roof' above a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{lsfz}~$p$ (lower \ital{sforzato}) to put a reversed
`roof' below a note head at pitch $p$.
 \item \keyindex{upzst}~$p$ (upper \ital{portato/staccato}) to put a
combined portato/staccato sign above a note head at pitch $p$,
 \item \keyindex{lpzst}~$p$ (lower \ital{portato/staccato}) to put a
combined portato/staccato sign below a note head at pitch $p$.
 \item \keyindex{flageolett}~$p$ to put a
thin circle above a note head at pitch $p$.
 \item \keyindex{upbow} to indicate a bowing for strings in upper direction.
 \item \keyindex{downbow} opposite to {\Bslash upbow}.
\end{itemize}
Because whole notes (breve, arbitrary, ...) have a different note head width
the accents appear not centered above them. Therefore you can use
\keyindex{wholeshift}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}| which centers accents
and others
which are centered above a quarter note head to appear centered above
a whole note. This is used for e.g.~\verb|\Fermataup|.

Also available are the variants\footnote{Thanks to Klaus {\sc Bechert}'s
corrections.} of the most used accents which will be automatically positioned
above or below a beam. Therefore the known accents are preceeded with the
letter `b' and, instead of the pitch, the beam reference number is appended as
an argument. Thus

\medskip
\begin{music}
\startextract
\Notes\ibu0f3\busfz0\qb0f\bupz0\qb0g\bust0\qb0h%
  \buppz0\qb0i\busf0\qb0j\butext0\tqh0k\en
\Notes\Ibl0lg5\blsfz0\qb0l\blpz0\qb0k\blst0\qb0j%
  \blppz0\qb0i\blsf0\qb0h\bltext0\tqb0g\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent was coded as:
\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\Notes\ibu0f3\busfz0\qb0f\bupz0\qb0g\bust0\qb0h%
  \buppz0\qb0i\busf0\qb0j\butext0\tqh0k\en
\Notes\Ibl0lg5\blsfz0\qb0l\blpz0\qb0k\blst0\qb0j%
  \blppz0\qb0i\blsf0\qb0h\bltext0\tqb0g\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}
\zkeyindex{busfz}
\zkeyindex{bupz}
\zkeyindex{bust}
\zkeyindex{buppz}
\zkeyindex{busf}
\zkeyindex{butext}
\zkeyindex{blsfz}
\zkeyindex{blpz}
\zkeyindex{blst}
\zkeyindex{blppz}
\zkeyindex{blsf}
\zkeyindex{bltext}
 \subsection{*Indication of \ital{x}-tuplets}

 Triplets and other $x$-tuplets --- in practice the italic numbers \ital{3},
\ital{4}, \ital{5}, etc. can be set at the right horizontal/vertical position
invoking the  \keyindex{triolet} or \keyindex{xtuplet} macros at the leftmost
position of the group, i.e. before the first note is coded.

 {\Bslash triolet} has only one argument, the pitch of the bottom of the
figure 3, {\Bslash xtuplet} has two arguments: the figure and its pitch.

If the figure has to be put above an upper beam or below a lower beam, using
the macros \keyindex{butext} (above) and \keyindex{bltext} (below) is advisable
to post the figure above or below the given beam. {\Bslash butext}
and {\Bslash bltext} have one argument, namely the beam number (namely the
same as the first argument of commands such as {\Bslash ibu} or {\Bslash
Ibu}). If the group of notes is not a triolet, the actual figure has to be
changed, redefining the macro \keyindex{txt} which is set up by default to:

\verb|\def\txt{\eightit 3}%|

\begin{music}
\parindent0mm
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}
\startpiece
\addspace\afterruleskip
\notesp\xtuplet6n\isluru0l\ibl0l0\qb0{lllll}\tslur0l\tqb0l\en\bar
\notesp\triolet n\isluru0l\Ibl0ln2\qb0{lm}\tslur0n\tqb0n\en
\notesp\ibslurd0k\Ibl0km2\qb0k\bltext0\qb0l\tdbslur0m\tqb0m\en\bar
\Notesp\triolet o\isluru0l\ql{lm}\tslur0n\ql n\en\bar
\Notesp\uptrio o16\ql l\en\notesp\cl n\en
\Notesp\uptrio p16\ql m\en\notesp\cl o\en
\endpiece
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\notesp\xtuplet6n\isluru0l\ibl0l0\qb0{lllll}\tslur0l\tqb0l\en\bar
\notesp\triolet n\isluru0l\Ibl0ln2\qb0{lm}\tslur0n\tqb0n\en
\notesp\ibslurd0k\Ibl0km2\qb0k\bltext0\qb0l\tdbslur0m\tqb0m\en\bar
\Notesp\triolet o\isluru0l\ql{lm}\tslur0n\ql n\en\bar
\Notesp\uptrio o16\ql l\en\notesp\cl n\en
\Notesp\uptrio p16\ql m\en\notesp\cl o\en
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\end{music}
\zkeyindex{xtuplet}\zkeyindex{triolet}
%\xtuplet{text}{pitch}
%  centers text(3 on second note, 4 between second and thirdnote,
%  5 on third note) on notes (-> \triolet{pitch})
 \subsection{*Usual ornaments}

 \subsubsection{Arpeggios}
\ital{Arpeggios} (i.e.~~~\arpeggio{-2}3) can be coded with the macro

\keyindex{arpeggio} $pm$

\noindent where $p$ is the pitch of
the base of the arpeggio symbol and $m$ is its multiplicity (one period is
equal to one space between staff lines, i.e. 5 points). This macro causes
no spacing. If should be issued before the concerned
chords. Its variant \keyindex{larpeggio} sets the arpeggio symbol nearly
one note head width on the left, in order to avoid collision with accidentals
in front of the chords.

 \subsubsection{Trills}
 Trills\index{trills} can be coded in several ways.
\keyindex{trille}~$pl$ (where $p$ is the pitch and $l$ is a number of current
\ital{noteskip}) yields \hbox to 1cm{\noteskip1cm\trille11\hss} while
\keyindex{Trille}~$pl$ yields \hbox to 2cm{\noteskip1cm\Trille12\hss}.

 For longer trills expanding over bars and line breaks, a better way consists
in specifying the beginning with \keyindex{Itrille}~$np$ where $n$ is the
trill reference number ($0\le n<6=$\keyindex{maxtrills}) and terminate it with
the command \keyindex{Ttrille}~$n$. If one wants the {\it tr} mention at the
beginning, then one should use \keyindex{ITrille}~$np$. The ancient commands
\keyindex{itrille}, \keyindex{ttrille}~$p$ and \keyindex{tTrille}~$p$ still
work but beware that their syntax is different, that the opening and the
closing must be in the same bar and that the use the same registers as
\verb|\Itrille 0|.

\medskip
\begin{remark} \verb|trille| and \verb|Trille| also exist in \musictex.
Unfortunately, the same macro names do not have the same syntax and the same
semantic in both packages and {\ttxem{musixcpt.tex}} forces the behaviour and
the syntax of \musictex. A solution to this problem consists in using
\keyindex{trilleC} and \keyindex{TrilleC} to have the \musictex{} behaviour,
and \keyindex{trilleX} and \keyindex{TrilleX} to have the \musixtex{}
behaviour, even when {\tt musixcpt} is invoked.
\end{remark}

For example:

\medskip
 \begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs12
\setclef1{6000}
%
\startextract
\notes\qu{CDEFGH}|\hu k\sk\ITrille 1p\itenu1l\wh l\enotes
\bar
\notes\Itrille 2A\itenu2E\whp E|\tten1\hlp l\sk\Ttrille 1\qu {mno}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\tten2\itenu2E\whp E|\ql{nmlkji}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\tten2\whp E\sk\sk\sk\sk\Ttrille2|\qu{hgfedc}\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
whose coding is
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs12
\setclef1{6000}
%
\startextract
\notes\qu{CDEFGH}|\hu k\sk\ITrille 1p\itenu1l\wh l\enotes
\bar
\notes\Itrille 2A\itenu1e\whp E|\tten1\hlp l\sk\Ttrille 1\qu {mno}\enotes
\bar
\Notes\tten1\itenu1E\whp E|\ql{nmlkji}\Toctfin1\enotes
\bar
\Notes\tten1\whp E\sk\sk\sk\sk\Ttrille2|\qu{hgfedc}\enotes
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \subsubsection{Piano pedal commands}
 \keyindex{PED} inserts the piano pedal command below the staff; pedal release
is specified by \keyindex{DEP}; also available are shorter variants of the
pedal signs which are invoked with \keyindex{sPED} and \keyindex{sDEP}; thus
the following example

\begin{music}
\setclef1\bass
\setstaffs1{2}
\startextract
\NOtes\PED\wh J|\qu h\enotes
\NOtes|\qu g\enotes
\NOtes|\hu k\enotes
\Notes\DEP\enotes
\bar
\NOtes\sPED\wh J|\qu h\enotes
\NOtes|\qu g\enotes
\NOtes|\hu k\enotes
\Notes\sDEP\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
 \noindent was coded as: \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \NOtes\PED\wh J|\qu
h\enotes
 \NOtes|\qu g\enotes
 \NOtes|\hu k\enotes
 \Notes\DEP\enotes \bar
 \NOtes\sPED\wh J|\qu h\enotes
 \NOtes|\qu g\enotes
 \NOtes|\hu k\enotes
 \Notes\sDEP\enotes
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 The vertical position of
\keyindex{PED}, \keyindex{sPED}, \keyindex{DEP} and \keyindex{sDEP} can be
globally changed by redefining its elevation, which is setup by default to

\verb|\def|\keyindex{raiseped}\verb|{-5}%|

If you only want to change a few of them, you can use the more fundamental
macros \keyindex{Ped}, \keyindex{sPed}, \keyindex{Dep} and \keyindex{sDep}
in combination with \keyindex{zchar} or \keyindex{zcharnote}.

 Since the \hbox to 1cm{ \Ped\hss} symbol is rather wide, it might collide
with bass notes in an ugly way. Then a solution consists in shifting if to the
left, by coding \verb|\loff{\PED}|.

 \subsubsection{Other ornaments}\index{ornaments}

 \begin{itemize}
 \item \keyindex{mordent}~$p$ for \hbox to .75em{\mordent 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{Mordent}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\Mordent 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{shake}~$p$ for \hbox to .75em{\shake 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{Shake}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\Shake 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{Shakel}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\Shakel 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{Shakesw}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\Shakesw 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{Shakene}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\Shakene 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{Shakenw}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\Shakenw 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{turn}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\turn 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{backturn}~$p$ for \hbox to 1.5em{\kern 0.6em\backturn 0\hss},
 \item \keyindex{fermataup}~$p$ puts a \itxem{fermata} at pitch $p$.
No spacing occurs.
 \item \keyindex{fermatadown}~$p$ puts a reverse \ital{fermata} at the same
place.
 \item \keyindex{Fermataup}~$p$ puts a \itxem{fermata} at pitch $p$ centered
above a whole note. No spacing occurs.
 \item \keyindex{Fermatadown}~$p$ puts a reverse \ital{fermata} at the same
place.
 \item A big \itxem{breathing} comma can be put above the staff --- to
indicate where the singer is welcome to breath, or to indicate a short rest
--- using \keyindex{zbreath} (no spacing) or \keyindex{cbreath} (centred in a
\verb|\noteskip| space). The \musictex\ \keyindex{breath} is no more available
since it involved a ``hard'' spacing of the width of that character, which
resulted in troubles with \musixtex.

 \item The \keyindex{caesura} command can also be used to insert a small
slash, such as

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTes\zhu j\hl{^e}\caesura\en
\Notes\zcu j\cl e\en
\endextract
\end{music}

 \end{itemize}

 \subsection{Dynamic signs} Various
dynamic signs can be posted with
\keyindex{crescendo}\verb|{|$l$\verb|}| or
\keyindex{decrescendo}\verb|{|$l$\verb|}|, to be used as arguments to
\verb|\zcharnote|, \verb|\zchar|, \verb|\uptext|, \verb|\zmidstaff|, etc.

Note: The biggest sign is $\simeq$ 68 mm long.

Alternately they can be produced using the pair of \keyindex{icresc} and
\keyindex{tcresc} or \keyindex{tdecresc}. Saying one time \verb|\icresc| you
can force several \verb|\tcresc| or \verb|\tdecresc| with the same starting
abscissa. Tha altitude of the [de]crescendo symbol is specified, not by the
\verb|\icresc| macro which only defines the stating abscissa, but by the
\verb|\tcresc| or \verb|\tdecresc| which is normally lifted up or down by
means of a \verb|\zmidstaff| or a \verb|\zcharnote| command whose first
argument has to be adjusted according to your visual needs.

\begin{music}
\parindent0pt
\generalmeter{\meterfrac{12}8}
\setstaffs1{2}
\startextract
\Notes\cmidstaff\ppp|\ca c\en
\Notes\icresc|\ca{defgh'abcde}\en
\Notes\zmidstaff{\loff\tcresc}\cmidstaff\fff|\ca{'f}\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent which was coded as:
\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\cmidstaff\ppp|\ca c\en
\Notes\icresc|\ca{defgh'abcde}\en
\Notes\zmidstaff{\loff\tcresc}\cmidstaff\fff|\ca{'f}\en
\end{verbatim}

\begin{music}
\parindent0pt
\generalmeter{\meterfrac{12}8}
\setstaffs1{2}
\startextract
\Notes\cmidstaff\ppp|\ca c\en
\Notes\icresc|\ca{defgh'abcde}\en
\Notes\zcharnote N{\tcresc}\cmidstaff\fff|\zcharnote q{\tcresc}\ca{'f}\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent which was coded as:
\begin{verbatim}
\Notes\cmidstaff\ppp|\ca c\en
\Notes\icresc|\ca{defgh'abcde}\en
\Notes\zcharnote N{\tcresc}\cmidstaff\fff|\zcharnote q{\tcresc}\ca{'f}\en
\end{verbatim}


 Intensity conventional signs are: \keyindex{ppp},
\keyindex{pppp},
\keyindex{ppp},
\keyindex{pp},
\keyindex{p},
\keyindex{mp},
\keyindex{mf},
\keyindex{f},
\keyindex{fp},
\keyindex{sF},
\keyindex{ff},
\keyindex{fff},
\keyindex{ffff}, resulting in \pppp, \ppp, \pp,
\p,
\mezzopiano,
\mf,
\f,
\fp,
\sF,
\ff,
\fff\ and
\ffff.


 \subsection{Length of note stems}

%\begin{changebar}

Normally, the length of note  stems is the distance of one octave, i.e.
\verb|7\internote|. This is equivalent to 4.66 \keyindex{interbeam}. The
length of the stems may be changed using the macro \keyindex{stemlength}, e.g.:

  \verb|\stemlength{5.2}|

  \noindent which will set the stemlength to 5.2 \verb|\interbeam|. The default
 is
\keyindex{stemlength}\verb|{4.66}|.

Choral music with four voices is often typeset into two staffs. Thus, each
staff holds two voices, one being typeset with stems up, the other with stems
down. If the command \keyindex{stemcut} has been previously issued, stems that
are outside the staff are cut depending on the pitch of the notes. If this is
not wanted, this feature may be suppressed with the command
\keyindex{nostemcut}. The default behaviour is \keyindex{stemcut} in plain
\musixtex, and \keyindex{nostemcut} when {\ttxem{musixcpt.tex}} is invoked.

Normally, down stems never end above the middle line of the staff and up stems
never below that line. This extension of the stems may be inhibited for the
next generated stem using the command \keyindex{stdstemfalse}.  There is no
\keyindex{stdstemtrue} since \keyindex{stdstemfalse} is reset after
generating each new stem.

%\end{changebar}


 \subsection{*Brackets and parentheses}


Several brackets and parentheses have been provided for musical typesetting
needs. These are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \keyindex{lpar}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}| and
\keyindex{rpar}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}| which yield small
parenthesis to enclose notes. These are used for \ital{cautionary} accidentals
but more comprehensive macros fulfill that specific purpose (see \ref{cautionary})
 \item \keyindex{bracket}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}{|$n$\verb|}| to post square
brackets of width $n$-internotes at left of a chord. Usually these brackets
are used on keyboard instruments to specify, either two neighbouring notes
played with a single finger, or some chord notes to be played with the
alternate hand.
 \item \keyindex{doublethumb}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}|, to indicate a bracket of
height 2\verb|\internote|.
 \item \keyindex{ovbkt}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}{|$n$\verb|}{|$s$\verb|}| and
\keyindex{unbkt}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}{|$n$\verb|}{|$s$\verb|}|
draw a bracket over the music starting at the current position at pitch $p$,
width $n\times$\verb|noteskip| and slope $s$ (1 $\sim$ 1.125[degree]).
causing no space.
 \item \keyindex{uptrio}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}{|$n$\verb|}{|$s$\verb|}| and
\keyindex{downtrio}\verb|{|$p$\verb|}{|$n$\verb|}{|$s$\verb|}|, which are like
\verb|\ovbkt| but with free definable \keyindex{txt} centers in the middle.

 \item \keyindex{varline} $h$ $\ell$ $s$ builds an oblique line of height $h$ (a
dimension), of length $\ell$ and of slope $s$. Used to build oblique brackets.

This feature is particularly useful for people who want to typeset
\itxem{baroque} music using the ancient \itxem{ornament codings} rather than
the modern equivalents. As a compromise, some macros kindly provided by Ian
{\sc Collier} in Great Britain have slightly been updated and provided.
 \end{itemize}


For example:

\begin{music}
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1\bass
\startextract
\NOtes\bracket C8\zq C\qu J\en
\NOtes|\doublethumb g\rq h\qu g\en
\NOtes\lpar c\rpar c\qu c\en
\NOtes\unbkt C15\qu {FH}|\ovbkt n14\ql{kl}\en
\NOtes\downtrio C16\qu {FH}|\uptrio o14\ql{lm}\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1{\bass}
\startextract
\NOtes\bracket C8\zq C\qu J\en
\NOtes|\doublethumb g\rq h\qu g\en
\NOtes\lpar c\rpar c\qu c\en
\NOtes\unbkt C15\qu {FH}|\ovbkt n14\ql{kl}\en
\NOtes\downtrio C16\qu {FH}|\uptrio o14\ql{lm}\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\begin{remark} if you used \verb|\input musicext| before, pay attention to the
commands \keyindex{ovbkt} and \keyindex{unbkt}, their parameter meaning has
changed from \musictex{} to \musixtex.
 \end{remark}
 
 \subsection{New line synchronization of coding}
 The procedure named \keyindex{everystaff} is executed each time a new system
is typed. It is normally void, but it can be defined (simply by \verb|\def|%
\keyindex{everystaff}\verb|{...}|) to tell \musixtex\ to post anything
reasonable at the beginning of each system. It was used in the example
{NWIDOR} to post octaviation dashed lines at the end of the piece.

Caution should be exercised to call \verb|\everystaff| before
\verb|\startpiece| if its effect is needed for the first system of the score.

 The procedure named \keyindex{atnextline}, normally void, is executed at the
next computed or forced line break (using
\keyindex{alaligne} or \keyindex{alapage}). More precisely, it is executed
after the break and before the next system is typed. Thus it is fit for
posting new definitions of layout parameters, when no system is
pending\footnote{Its logic is similar to plain \TeX's \keyindex{vadjust}
command.}.

 \index{tenor violin clef}In some scores, tenor parts are not coded using the
\ital{bass} clef, but using rather the \ital{violin clef} subscripted by a
{\tt8}. This is not directly supported by the \keyindex{setclef}
command, but it can be handled using \keyindex{everystaff} and
\keyindex{zcharnote}.
As an example the following score

\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{4}
\setclef1\bass
\def\everystaff{%
  \znotes&\zchar{-6}{\eightrm\kern-2\Interligne8}%
  &\zchar{-6}{\eightrm\kern-2\Interligne8}\en}%
\startextract
\NOTes\ha{HIJK}&\ha{efgh}&\ha{hijk}&\ha{hmlk}\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\instrumentnumber{4}
\setclef1\bass
\def\everystaff{%
  \znotes&\zchar{-6}{\eightrm \kern -2\Interligne 8}%
  &\zchar{-6}{\eightrm \kern -2\Interligne 8}\en}%
\startextract
\NOTes\ha{HIJK}&\ha{efgh}&\ha{hijk}&\ha{hmlk}\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

\noindent{\sl{\bfseries Caution:} the \verb|\everystaff| must be called before
\verb|startpiece| in order to have that subscript at the first staff.}
\section{Small and tiny notes}
Before entering details, let us point out that we are presently concerned with
typing notes of smaller size than the normal one, without attempting to change
the interval between the five lines building a single staff. Changing staff
line interval will be treated in a further section.
 \subsection{Cadenzas and explicit ornaments}
 Ornaments and \itxem{cadenzas} usually need to be written using smaller
notes\footnote{This is independent of the staff size.}. This can be done
everywhere by stating \keyindex{smallnotesize} or \keyindex{tinynotesize}.
Normal note size is restored by \keyindex{normalnotesize}.\index{ornaments}

 These macros only have a local scope. Thus, if these macros are invoked
outside the \verb|\notes...\enotes| pair, the change is valid for
the rest of the piece unless explicitely modified but, if they are invoked
inside, their effect is local to the current staff of the current
\verb|\notes...\enotes| pair.
As an example, the following excerpt (beginning
of the Aria of the ``Creation'' by Joseph {\sc Haydn})\index{Haydn, J.@{\sc
Haydn, J.}}

\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{2}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\def\qbl#1#2#3{\ibl{#1}{#2}{#3}\qb{#1}{#2}}
\setstaffs2{2}
\setclef1\bass
\setclef2\bass
\startbarno0
\startextract
\NOtes\qp&\zmidstaff{\bf II}\qp|\qu g\en
% mesure 1
\bar
\Notes\itieu2J\wh J&\zw N\ibl0c0\qb0e|\qu j\en
\notes&\qbl0c0|\multnoteskip\tinyvalue\tinynotesize
  \Ibbu1ki2\qb1{kj}\tqh1i\hqsk\en
\Notes&\qb0e\tbl0\qb0c|\qu j\en
\Notes&\ibl0c0\qb0{ece}\tbl0\qb0c|\ql l\sk\ql j\en
% mesure 2
\bar
\Notes\ttie2\wh J&\ql J\sk\ql L|\zqupp g\qbl1e0%
  \zq c\qb1e\zq c\qb1e\zq c\tbl1\zqb1e\en
\notes&|\sk\ccu h\en
\Notes&\ql N\sk\ibl0L{-4}\qbp0L|\ibl1e0\zq c\zqb1e\cu g%
  \zq c\zqb1e\raise\Interligne\ds\zqu g\qb1g\en
\notes&\sk\tbbl0\tbl0\qb0J|\tbl1\zq c\qb1e\en
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent can be coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\instrumentnumber{2}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\setstaffs2{2}
\setclef2{\bass}
\setclef1{\bass}
\startbarno=0
\startextract
\NOtes\qp&\zmidstaff{\bf II}\qp|\qu g\en
% mesure 1
\bar
\Notes\itieu2J\wh J&\zw N\ibl0c0\qb0e|\qu j\en
\notes&\ibl0c0\qb0c|\multnoteskip\tinyvalue\tinynotesize
  \Ibbu1ki2\qb1{kj}\tqh1i\en
\Notes&\qb0e\tbl0\qb0c|\qu j\en
\Notes&\ibl0c0\qb0{ece}\tbl0\qb0c|\ql l\sk\ql j\en
% mesure 2
\bar\Notes\ttie2\wh J&\ql J\sk\ql L|\zqupp g\qbl1e0%
  \zq c\qb1e\zq c\qb1e\zq c\tbl1\zqb1e\en
\notes&|\sk\ccu h\en
\Notes&\ql N\sk\ibl0L{-4}\qbp0L|\ibl1e0\zq c\zqb1e\cu g%
  \zq c\zqb1e\raise\Interligne\ds\zqu g\qb1g\en
\notes&\sk\tbbl0\tbl0\qb0J|\tbl1\zq c\qb1e\en
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \subsection{Grace notes}
 Grace notes are a special case of small and tiny notes: the difference is
that they are always coded as eighth notes with an oblique bar over the flag.
To perform this, special variants of \keyindex{cu} and \keyindex{cl} have been
provided, namely \keyindex{grcu} and \keyindex{grcl}, with the only difference
that the flag has been slashed. Using this together with the note reduction
macro, grace notes (optionally chord grace notes) can be easily coded:

\begin{music}
\startextract
\NOTes\hu h\enotes
\notes\multnoteskip\smallvalue\smallnotesize\grcu j\enotes
\NOTes\hu i\enotes
\bar
\notes\multnoteskip\tinyvalue\tinynotesize\zq h\grcl j\enotes
\NOTEs\wh i\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
The previous example was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\startextract
\NOTes\hu h\enotes
\notes\multnoteskip\smallvalue\smallnotesize\grcu j\enotes
\NOTes\hu i\enotes
\bar
\notes\multnoteskip\tinyvalue\tinynotesize\zq h\grcl j\enotes
\NOTEs\wh i\enotes
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 \subsection{Other note shapes}\label{othernotes} The classical note heads
given above --- namely \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar7}~~, \raise.5ex
\hbox{\musixchar8}~~ and \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar9}~~~
--- can be replaced with less classical note heads, for example to code
special \itxem{violin harmonic notes} or \itxem{percussion music}. See an
example in \ref{abnormalscores}.

 At present time, alternate available note heads can be found in the
extension library, see \ref{diam}, \ref{perc}, \ref{gregnotes} and \ref{litu}.

\section{Staff size} \index{staff size}
 \subsection{Moving from 20pt to 16pt, 24pt or 29pt staff sizes and
conversely}
 You also want to write some parts of your score in 20pt
staff size and others in 16pt or 24pt or 28.8pt staff size, namely
for distinct parts of pieces. Changing the \ixem{general staff size}
is done by saying:

\keyindex{smallmusicsize}, or \keyindex{normalmusicsize}, or
\keyindex{largemusicsize}, or \keyindex{Largemusicsize}.

\noindent respectively.
 \subsection{Changing staff size for certain instruments}\label{staffspacing}
Regardless of the general choice of \verb|\smallmusicsize| or
\verb|\normalmusicsize|, it is now possible to assign certain instruments --
not separate staffs belonging to a same instrument -- to have narrower or larger
\itxem{staff size}, i.e. narrower or larger \itxem{staff spacing}. This is done using

\keyindex{setsize} $n$\verb|{|\ital{size}\verb|}|

\noindent where $n$ is the number of the instrument considered. Five different
\ital{sizes} are available as standards: \keyindex{normalvalue}, which is
the default, \keyindex{smallvalue} (0.80 times narrower),
\keyindex{tinyvalue} (0.64 times narrower), \keyindex{largevalue} (1.2 times
larger) and \keyindex{Largevalue} (1.44
times larger). But, if you know perfectly what
you are doing, you can also say:

\verb|\setsize 3{2.0}|

\noindent which will provide the third instrument with staffs of spacing
twice the standard value. In that case, \musixtex\ will use the nearest
symbol size available, but this is likely to be rather ugly.

 An alternate
and equivalent coding --- a remnant from \musictex\ --- could be:

\verb|\def\staffspacingiii{2.0}|\zkeyindex{staffspacing}



\verb|\setsize| must be invoked before the starting command
\verb|\startpiece|, since this statement does not only change the vertical
spacing between staff lines, but it also changes the size of the key,
accidental and note symbols to fit the modified staff line spacing.

 However, it must be emphasized that non-standard staff spacings use the
nearest available font size. This make no serious problem for notes and
accidentals which may be slightly too small or too big, but clefs and rests
may appear to be shifted upwards or downwards. This trouble is progressively
removed, but it requires changing the {\tt musix*} fonts, with some possible
characters forgotten... or the fact that user uses a font older than T.60
version.

As an example, we give two bars of the \ital{Ave Maria} by Charles {\sc
Gounod}\index{Gounod, C.@{\sc Gounod, C.}}, based on the first prelude of
Johann-Sebastian Bach's \ital{Well Tempered Clavier} (transcription for
organ, violin and voice, thanks to Markus {\sc Veittes}):\label{avemaria}

\begin{music}
\def\oct{\advance\transpose by 7}
\def\liftqs#1{\raise#1\Interligne\qs}
\parindent0pt
\sepbarrules
\instrumentnumber{3}
\generalmeter{\meterC}
\setinterinstrument2{3\Interligne}
\setsize3\tinyvalue
\setsize2\tinyvalue
\setclef1\bass
\setstaffs1{2}
\startpiece\addspace\afterruleskip
%Takt 9
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp e|\ds&\oct
  \itieu5h\hl h&\tx ~~~gra---*\itied4h\hu h\enotes
\notes|\ibbl0j3\qb0h\tqb0l\enotes
\notes|\ibbl1k0\qb1{ohl}\tqb1o\enotes
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp e|\ds&\oct
  \ttie5\ibl4c0\qb4h&\ttie4\ibu5g{-3}\qb5h\enotes
\notes|\ibbl0j3\qb0h\tqb0l&\oct\qb4a&\tx ---*\tqh5a\enotes
\notes|\ibbl1k0\qb1o\qb1h&\oct\qb4b&\tx ~~ti~-*\cu b\enotes
\notes|\qb1l\tqb1o&\oct\tqb4c&\tx a*\cu c\enotes
\bar
%Takt 10
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp d|\ds&\oct
  \qlp d&\tx ~~~ple---*\ibsluru4e\qup d\enotes
\notes|\ibbu1g3\bigaccid\qb1{^f}\tqh1h\enotes
\notes|\ibbu2i0\qb2k\qb2f\enotes
\notes|\qb2h\tqh2k&\oct\cl e&\tubslur4f\cu e\enotes
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp d|\ds&\oct\ql d&\tx na,*\qu d\enotes
\notes|\ibbu1g3\qb1f\tqh1h\enotes
\notes|\ibbu2i0\qb2{kfh}\tqh2k&\qp&\qp\enotes
\endpiece
\end{music}
 This example was coded as:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\def\oct{\advance\transpose by 7}
\def\liftqs#1{\raise#1\Interligne\qs}
\parindent0pt
\sepbarrules
\instrumentnumber{3}
\generalmeter{\meterC}
\setinterinstrument2{3\Interligne}
\setsize3\tinyvalue
\setsize2\tinyvalue
\setclef1\bass
\setstaffs1{2}
\startpiece\addspace\afterruleskip
%Takt 9
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp e|\ds&\oct
  \itieu5h\hl h&\tx ~~~gra---*\itied4h\hu h\enotes
\notes|\ibbl0j3\qb0h\tqb0l\enotes
\notes|\ibbl1k0\qb1{ohl}\tqb1o\enotes
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp e|\ds&\oct
  \ttie5\ibl4c0\qb4h&\ttie4\ibu5g{-3}\qb5h\enotes
\notes|\ibbl0j3\qb0h\tqb0l&\oct\qb4a&\tx ---*\tqh5a\enotes
\notes|\ibbl1k0\qb1o\qb1h&\oct\qb4b&\tx ~~ti~-*\cu b\enotes
\notes|\qb1l\tqb1o&\oct\tqb4c&\tx a*\cu c\enotes
\bar
%Takt 10
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp d|\ds&\oct
  \qlp d&\tx ~~~ple---*\ibsluru4e\qup d\enotes
\notes|\ibbu1g3\bigaccid\qb1{^f}\tqh1h\enotes
\notes|\ibbu2i0\qb2k\qb2f\enotes
\notes|\qb2h\tqh2k&\oct\cl e&\curve222\tubslur4f\cu e\enotes
\notes\zhl c\liftqs6\qupp d|\ds&\oct\ql d&\tx na,*\qu d\enotes
\notes|\ibbu1g3\qb1f\tqh1h\enotes
\notes|\ibbu2i0\qb2{kfh}\tqh2k&\qp&\qp\enotes
\endpiece
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\section{Layout parameters}
 Most layout parameters are set by \musixtex\ to reasonable default values.
However, sophisticated scores\footnote{To our knowledge, the most complicated
scores are those written for the piano, during the romantic and post-romantic
periods.} may need more place below the lowest staff, between staves, etc.
\def\nochange{(\ital{NOT to be changed})} We give below a short list of the
most significant parameters.
 \subsection{List of layout parameters}
 \begin{remark} the mention ``\nochange'' does not mean that this parameter
cannot be changed, but that it should not be modified directly, e.g.\ by
saying something like \verb|\Interligne=14pt|. In other words, changing these
parameters must be performed using more comprehensive macros which not only
update them but also perform some other compulsory related changes.
 \end{remark}

\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{Interligne} :]vertical distance between the base of staff
lines of the current instrument, taking no account of a possible specification
of \keyindex{setsize$n$} \nochange.
 \item[\keyindex{internote} :]the vertical spacing of contiguous notes of
the current instrument, taking account of a possible specification of
\keyindex{setsize$n$} \nochange.
 \item[\keyindex{Internote} :]the vertical spacing of contiguous notes of
the instrument(s) whose \keyindex{setsize$n$} has the \ital{default
value} of one (\keyindex{normalvalue}),
i.e.\ the half of \verb|\Interligne| \nochange

 \item[\keyindex{staffbotmarg} :]margin below the first staff of the lowest
instrument. Changes are recognized at the next system and default is
\verb|3\Interligne|.
 \item[\keyindex{stafftopmarg} :]margin above the upper staff of the upper
instrument. Changes are recognized at the next system and default is
\verb|3\Interligne|.
 \item[\keyindex{interbeam} :]vertical distance between beams. \nochange.
 \item[\keyindex{interportee} :]the distance between the bottom of one staff and
the bottom of the next one. It is set to
\verb|2|\keyindex{interstaff}\verb|\internote| at the next system.
Therefore, trying to change \verb|\interportee| will have no effect.
 %\check
 \item[\keyindex{interinstrument} :]the additional vertical distance between
two different instruments. This means that the distance between the upper
staff of the previous instrument and the lowest line of the current
instrument is equal to \keyindex{interportee+\Bslash interinstrument}. This
value is normally zero, but it helps putting additional space between
distinct instruments for the sake of clarity. This is a general dimension
register which holds for each of the vertical spaces between instruments,
except above the upper one, in which case this interval is irrelevant.
As usual in \TeX, it can be set using a command such as

 \verb|\interinstrument=10pt|

 \noindent or

 \verb|\interinstrument=6\internote|


 However, this general parameter can be overridden for the space above a
specific instrument. For example (see the example {\tt angescao.tex}) one can
state:

\keyindex{setinterinstrument} $n$\verb|{1\Interligne}|

\noindent to force an additional spacing of one \verb|\Interligne|
above instrument $n$, whatever the value of \keyindex{interinstrument}.
 This feature can usefully be used to have more space before instruments
representing \itxem{voices}, in order to have enough place to put
\itxem{lyrics} without assigning these lyrics a zero staff specific instrument
(useful to avoid having too many declared instruments in a choir score).

 The \verb|\setinterinstrument| is identical to the ancient --- and still
working --- \musictex\ command:

 \verb|\def|\keyindex{interinstrumentiii}\verb|{5\interligne}|

 \noindent to add 5\verb|\interligne| above the 3rd instrument.
 %\check


 \item[\keyindex{systemheight} :]the distance from the bottom of the
lowest staff to the top of the highest staff of the upper instrument. This is
the height of the vertical bars (single, double, repeats, etc.) \nochange.
\end{description}
 In addition, when handling notes of a given staff of a given instrument, the
following dimensions are available (note these are not true registers, but
\ital{equivalenced symbols} through a \verb|\def|):
\begin{itemize}
 \item\keyindex{altplancher} : the altitude of the lowest line of the lowest
instrument \nochange.
 \item\keyindex{altitude} : the altitude of the lowest line of the lowest
staff of the current instrument \nochange.
 \item\keyindex{altportee} : the altitude of the lowest line of the current
staff \nochange.

 %??? Next perhaps will change to steps of \verb|\internote|.

 \item\keyindex{stemfactor} : a parameter defining the size of half, quarter
and hooked eighth notes stems. Normally a stem has the length of one octave,
i.e. 3.5\keyindex{Interligne}. However, this is not valid for small size
notes and, therefore, the stem size is related to the \keyindex{interbeam}
dimensions which, in turn, is \ital{normally} equal to 0.75
\keyindex{Interligne}. Thus the normal value of \keyindex{stemfactor} is
4.66, but it can be shortened for any purpose by saying, for example:

 \keyindex{stemlength}\verb|{3.5}|
\end{itemize}
 \subsection{Changing layout parameters}
 Most of these values can be changed, but only between the end of the
previous system and the beginning of the next one. This can be inserted
between a \keyindex{stoppiece} (or a \keyindex{endpiece})
and a \keyindex{contpiece} (or a \keyindex{startpiece}), but it is
wiser to say, for example:

\verb|\def\atnextline{\stafftopmarg=5\Interligne}|

 The user may prefer to change \keyindex{staffbotmarg} or
to feed \keyindex{interstaff} with a
given integer number, but this can be done only between a
\keyindex{stoppiece} (or a \keyindex{endpiece}) and a
\keyindex{contpiece} (or a \keyindex{startpiece}), but it is wiser to use
\keyindex{atnextline} as previously.

 It is also wise to use \keyindex{atnextline} to change the
number of instruments, the staff spacings, the number of staffs at the next
line... provided that the coding of the notes \ital{resists} an unexpected
line change executing the \keyindex{atnextline}.
 \subsection{Changing the staff distance within systems} The vertical
distance of instruments with more than one staff can be changed, either
outside \verb|\startpiece|...\verb|\endpiece| or using \keyindex{atnextline},
by saying:

\keyindex{interstaff}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|

 Then the spacing between the staffs of the instruments will be
$n$\verb|\internote|. Note that \verb|\interstaff| applies to all the
instruments, but each distinct instrument may have a different
\verb|\internote| (see \ref{staffspacing}).

 Note that this command is equivalent to an existing remnant of \musictex,
namely:

 \verb|\def|\keyindex{interfacteur}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|


 \medskip The distance between two different
instruments can be increased by saying

\keyindex{interinstrument}\verb|=|\ital{any \TeX-dimension}

\noindent for all additional inter-instrument distances, or

\keyindex{setinterinstrument} $n$\verb|{|\ital{any \TeX-dimension}\verb|}|

\noindent for single distances.
 \subsection{Changing the number of lines in staffs}\index{staff line number}
\label{stafflinenumber}
Unless explicitely specified, staffs consist of five lines, in accordance to
the normal way of coding music scores. However, exceptions might be
preferred when using \musixtex~:

\begin{itemize}
 \item \itxem{gregorian music} is often written using staff of
four lines instead of five\footnote{German: \ital{Quadratnotation}.},
 \item \itxem{percussion music} (e.g.~drums, triangle) needs one, two, three
 or five lines, since the pitch cannot change but the number of percussion
 instruments.
 \item \itxem{guitar tablature} needs six lines. Although \ital{real} guitar
 players hate guitar tablature,
 for beginners they are a big help. Not ready yet. The lines
 are, but not the additional macros.
 
 \item Early baroque music sometimes uses staffs with 6, 7, or 8 lines.
 
 \end{itemize}

 Therefore \musixtex\ allows for choosing the number of lines of
the staffs of an instrument. This is done by
\keyindex{setlines}~$n$\verb|{|$N$\verb|}| --- where $n$ is the number of the
wanted instrument as usual --- and $N$ the number of lines of the specific
staff. Allowed numbers are up to 9 lines. For example:\label{gregorian}
 
\keyindex{setlines}\verb|2{4}|

\noindent will make the instrument number 2 to have staffs of four
lines, that is, fit for gregorian music.
 \subsection{Resetting normal layout parameters}
 Except the general size which
has to be explicitely changed if needed using \keyindex{smallmusicsize},
\keyindex{normalmusicsize}, \keyindex{largemusicsize}, or
\keyindex{Largemusicsize}, all layout registers are reset to \ixem{default
values} by \keyindex{resetlayout}, which are explicitly:

 \begin{itemize}
 \item \keyindex{staffbotmarg} and \keyindex{stafftopmarg} are set to
\verb|3\Interligne|.
 \item \keyindex{interstaff} is set to \verb|9|.
 \item The number of lines of all instruments are reset to 5.
 \item All clef symbols are standard clef symbols.
\end{itemize}
\noindent
Besides, saying \keyindex{begin\LBR music\RBR} invokes \verb|\resetlayout|.
 \subsection{Typesetting one-line excerpts rather than large scores}
Very often, what is wanted is not to typeset a large comprehensive score of
several lines and pages, but an excerpt of one or two bars, preferably
centered such as the various examples of this manual. This can be done simply
by replacing \keyindex{startpiece} with
\keyindex{startextract} and \verb|\endpiece| or \verb|\stoppiece| with
\keyindex{endextract}. It is sometimes useful to get more than one excerpt in
one line, this can be done with redefining of \keyindex{extractline}.

With saying:

\keyindex{let\Bslash extractline\Bslash hbox}

\noindent you can put more than one example in one line. Helpful for getting
\itxem{musical footnotes}, which explain the playing of special trills or
give alternative ways of playing, is the redefining to:

\keyindex{let\Bslash extractline\Bslash leftline}

Besides, all changes inbetween
\keyindex{begin\LBR music\RBR}...\keyindex{end\LBR music\RBR} are local,
means not global.

 If you want to terminate it without a bar, you code
\keyindex{zendextract} which acts like \verb|\zstoppiece|.
 \subsection{*Lyrics}\index{lyrics}\label{lyrics}
 While they pose nearly no problem with \musictex\ which works using the glue
facility of \TeX, lyrics raise several serious difficulties with \musixtex.
The reason for that is that lyrics usually consist of \ital{text} which in
turn consists of characters whose width is definitely not stretchable nor
shrinkable proportionally to \verb|\noteskip| or \verb|\elemskip|.

 Thus the width of a sequence of notes like

 \begin{music}
 \startextract
 \NOTEs\zcharnote{-5}{Words }\qu h\en
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \noindent may be either the width of ``{\tt Words }'' with the current font,
or it may be \verb|1\elemskip|, whatever the largest. In the first case, the
width is fixed (see \keyindex{hardspace}), in the second its width is not the
same at \musixtex's first and second passes. But the unfortunate situation is that
\musixtex\ \ital{must} know whether this feature has a \ital{hard} (not scalable)
or a \ital{scalable} width \ital{at the first pass}, while the inequality
is solved only at the second.

 This means that, in addition to the three pass system, the user must run
trial and errors to find out whether some lyrics are wider than the final note
spacing, or smaller. In that case a wrong decision might lead to questionable
``\verb|Underfull hbox|''-es filled with ugly glue, or it may result in
awful ``\verb|Overfull hbox|'' with its heavy bar punishment and possible
over writings.

 However, before discussing this problem, we first describe the various ways of
inserting lyrics under --- or above --- a staff.

 \subsubsection{Getting enough vertical space for lyrics}   Since songs are
usually equivalent to a one-staff instrument (possibly with several voices)
the recommended solution consists in adjusting the distance between
instruments using either \keyindex{interinstrument}\verb|=|\ital{any
\TeX-dimension} to give more place below all instruments or using
\keyindex{setinterinstrument} to make more space above. Note that {\Bslash
setinterinstrument} defines spacing above and not below an instrument. Since
lyrics are usually set below the staff, the first argument of a
\verb|\setinterinstrument| should be the song instrument number \ital{minus
one}.

 In the case of a single staff tune, or if the song instrument is the lowest
one, then additional place can be provided using \keyindex{staffbotmarg}.

 \subsubsection{Posting lyrics}
 Lyrics can be introduced in several ways.
 \begin{enumerate}
 \item One archaic solution could be to define a special instrument for the lyrics
text, without effective staff, namely using the command
\keyindex{setstaffs}~$n$\verb|{|$p$\verb|}| described in \ref{whatspecify}.
The inconvenience of this solution is that it increases the number of
instruments, which is limited to 6 in standard \musixtex, although it can be
increased to 9 using {\tt musixadd.tex} and 12 with {\tt musixmad.tex}.

 \medskip
 Therefore, better solutions consist is posting the lyrics in the same
instrument as the tune, provided that inter-instrument spacing has been
adapted.

 \item Another simple obvious solution consists in using the command
\keyindex{zcharnote} to post the text at any position (computed in
\verb|\internote|s) with respect to the lower line of the current staff.
The pitch should be usually negative to have the text below the staff. It
could also be specified like a note pitch, for example ``{\tt a}'' if the song
is in G-clef. The drawback is that the pitch has to be repeated for each text
of each note, which is tideous unless a special macro has been defined.

 \item Rather than \verb|\zcharnote| and other \verb|\?charnote| commands, one
should rather use \keyindex{zchar}, \keyindex{cchar} (centered) or
\keyindex{lchar} (expanded to left) which only allow absolute numbers
(internally multiplied by {\Bslash internote}). These command have the same
drawback as above, namely the vertical position has to be repeated each time.

 \item Of easier use are the commands \keyindex{zsong} (right of the note),
\keyindex{lsong} (left) and \keyindex{csong} (centered) which post the lyrics
at the lower staff line \ital{minus} the previous
\keyindex{interinstrument}~$n$ or the \keyindex{staffbotmarg} quantity. These
commands only have one argument, namely the lyrics text:


\begin{center}
\keyindex{zsong}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}|\quad
\keyindex{lsong}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}|\quad
\keyindex{csong}\verb|{|\ital{text}\verb|}|
\end{center}

 Depending on the values of the inter-instrument spacings and margins, the
resulting vertical position might be inappropriate. Then it can be changed for
any specific $n$-th instrument until further change using

\begin{quote}
\keyindex{setsongraise}~$n$\verb|{|\ital{any \TeX-dimension}\verb|}|
\end{quote}

 \medskip As an example, the following French song

 \begin{music}
 \generalsignature{1}
 \startextract
 \geometricskipscale
 \NOtes\zsong{Au }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{clair }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{de }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{la }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOTes\zsong{lu- }\hu i\en
 \NOTes\zsong{ne, }\hu h\en
 \bar
 \NOtes\zsong{mon }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{a- }\qu i\en
 \NOtes\zsong{mi }\qu h\en
 \NOtes\zsong{Pier- }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOTes\zsong{rot, }\wh g\sk\en
 \endextract
 \end{music}

\noindent was coded as:

\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \generalsignature{1}
 \startextract
 \geometricskipscale
 \NOtes\zsong{Au }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{clair }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{de }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{la }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOTes\zsong{lu- }\hu i\en
 \NOTes\zsong{ne, }\hu h\en
 \bar
 \NOtes\zsong{mon }\qu g\en
 \NOtes\zsong{a- }\qu i\en
 \NOtes\zsong{mi }\qu h\en
 \NOtes\zsong{Pier- }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOTes\zsong{rot, }\wh g\sk\en
 \endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}


  You can also use the macros from \verb|musixcho.tex|, which result in the
same vertical positionning as \keyindex{zsong} and other \verb|\?song| do, but
the text of the lyrics are better justified around the related note.

 \end{enumerate}

 \subsubsection{Handling lyrics width versus scalable note spacings}

 If one uses either \verb|\zsong| or \verb|\csong| or \verb|\lsong| without
caution, one will probably get awful things such as:

 \begin{music}
 \generalsignature{1}
 \startextract
 \geometricskipscale
 \Notes\zsong{Au }\qu g\en
 \Notes\zsong{clair }\qu g\en
 \Notes\zsong{de }\qu g\en
 \Notes\zsong{la }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOtes\zsong{lu- }\hu i\en
 \NOtes\zsong{ne, }\hu h\en
 \bar
 \Notes\zsong{mon }\qu g\en
 \Notes\zsong{a- }\qu i\en
 \Notes\zsong{mi }\qu h\en
 \Notes\zsong{Pier- }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOTes\zsong{rot, }\wh g\sk\en
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \noindent which is the same example as above, with all spacings divided by
1.41. Although locating ``overfull'' lyrics seems easy, it might be wiser to
force their visibility, which is done replacing \verb|\zsong| with
\keyindex{hsong} which encloses the hazardous text in a \verb|\hbox| of width
\verb|\noteskip|, whose overfilling is diagnosed as usual by Plain \TeX\ or
(especially in \LaTeX) by means of the \verb|\overfullrule=...| command:


 \begin{music}
 \generalsignature{1}
 \startextract
 \overfullrule 3pt%
 \geometricskipscale
 \Notes\hsong{Au }\qu g\en
 \Notes\hsong{clair }\qu g\en
 \Notes\hsong{de }\qu g\en
 \Notes\hsong{la }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOtes\hsong{lu- }\hu i\en
 \NOtes\hsong{ne, }\hu h\en
 \bar
 \Notes\hsong{mon }\qu g\en
 \Notes\hsong{a- }\qu i\en
 \Notes\hsong{mi }\qu h\en
 \Notes\hsong{Pier- }\qu h\en
 \bar
 \NOTes\hsong{rot, }\wh g\sk\en
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 Alternate versions of \verb|\hsong| are \keyindex{dhsong} which has a fixed
length of \verb|2\noteskip| and \keyindex{thsong} whose fixed length is
\verb|3\noteskip|. These are useful when the text is set below (or above) a
collective coding of two or three notes.

 Once one has diagnosed --- in the tentative final layout --- which lyrics
lead to overfull texts, several corrections may be tried:

\begin{enumerate}
 \item Increase the \keyindex{mulooseness} to have wider note spacing. This
may work, but the inconvenience is that all notes would be stretched, and not
only the faulty notes.
 \item Increase specific note spacings, replacing for example \verb|\Notes|
with \verb|\NOtes| or \verb|\Notesp|. This is the easiest solution which may
require several trials and errors since an increase of a few notes in a system
may lead to a small shrinking of the others, to keep the total length
constant.
 \item Decide that some notes --- only ``some'' notes, not all notes of the
score, neither all the notes of a given system --- would have a \itxem{hard
spacing} and not a scalable spacing. This is done using the command

 \begin{quote}
 \keyindex{hardnotes}\ital{ any hard \TeX\ dimension }\verb|\notes|\ital{
normal note specif. }\verb|\en|
 \end{quote}
 \noindent   which ends the \verb|\notes...\en| with a \itxem{hard spacing} (see
\verb|\hardspace| in \ref{hardspace}, p. \pageref{hardspace}) rather than a
scalable spacing.

 A more practical variant has been provided especially for lyrics, namely

 \begin{quote}
 \keyindex{hardlyrics}\ital{ any text }\verb|\notes|\ital{
normal note specif. }\verb|\en|
 \end{quote}
 \noindent which computes the width of ``any text'' by putting it in a
\verb|\hbox| and reverting to \verb|\hardnotes| to perform the remainder of the
task. In order to save repetitions, the text of the lyrics which has been used
to compute the hard note spacing can be retrieved under the command name
\keyindex{thelyrics}. \verb|\hardlyrics| must be followed by \verb|\notes|
(with the lyrics text inbetween), not by \verb|\Notes| nor \verb|\NOtes|, etc.


 Besides, since moving the lyrics text between \verb|\hardlyrics| and
\verb|\notes|\footnote{{\Bslash notes}, neither {\Bslash Notes} nor {\Bslash
NOtes} nor {\Bslash NOTes} etc.} together with replacing it with
\keyindex{thelyrics} at the initial location is a rather tedious operation
with text editors, another command has been provided, namely
\keyindex{softlyrics}:

 \verb|\softlyrics{|\ital{ any text }\verb|}|

 \noindent defines \verb|\thelyrics| to be ``\ital{ any text }'', so that
going from \verb|\hardlyrics| to the default scalable behaviour of
\verb|\noteskip| and inversely can easily be done by changing \verb|\hard|
into \verb|\soft| in the source text, with optional change of the number of
uppercase letters in \verb|\notes|.


 
 \medskip\begin{important} since \/\verb|\hardlyrics| computes
\/\verb|\noteskip|, its argument (before \/\verb|\notes|) may not refer to
\/\verb|\noteskip|... which is not already computed.
 \end{important}
 \end{enumerate}

 \subsubsection{A more comprehensive example of lyrics}
 Here is an example taken from the French catholic liturgy (a French
translation of the traditional \ital{Gloria in excelsis Deo}). We give first
the adapted source of a part of the score:


\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\overfullrule 3pt
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs11
%
\generalsignature{-1}\relax % one flat
\generalmeter{\meterfrac{2}{2}}
%
\staffbotmarg=5\Interligne\stafftopmarg=1.5\Interligne
\startpiece
\setsongraise1{2\Interligne}%
\znotes\uptext{\kern -9mm\raise 9pt\hbox{\bigtype
  Majestueux, sans tra\^\i ner \rm(\metron{\hu}{50})}}\enotes
\hardlyrics {\kern-5pt Gloire }\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu c\enotes
\notes\hsong{\`a }\cu c\enotes
\barre
\NOTes\hsong{Dieu~}\hu f\enotes
\notes\hsong{au}\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{plus~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{haut~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{des}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{cieux~}\qup h\enotes
\notes\hsong{et~}\cu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{paix~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\qu i\enotes
\hardlyrics{sur~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{la~}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\Notes\hsong{ter-}\qu f\enotes
\notes\hsong{re~}\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{aux~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics}\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{hom- }\notes\hsong{\thelyrics}\qu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{mes~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{qu'il~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu i\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{ai-}\hu g\enotes
\Notes\hsong{me.}\hu f\enotes
\Notes\uptext{\bf II }\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{Nous~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics}\qu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{lou-}\cu g\enotes
\NOtes\hsong{ons,}\hu h\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{nous~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{b\'e-}\cu j\enotes
\notes\hsong{nis-}\cu j\enotes
\NOtes\hsong{sons,}\hu h\enotes
\barre
\Notes\hsong{nous~}\qu h\enotes
\NOtes\hsong{t'a-}\hu g\enotes
\Notes\hsong{do-}\qu f\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{rons,~}\hu f\enotes
\notes\uptext{\bf I}\enotes
\hardlyrics{nous~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{glo-}\cu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{ri-}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\NOTEs\hsong{fions,~}\hu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{\kern -4pt nous~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{ren-}\cu h\enotes
\notes\zsong{dons~}\cu i\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{gr\^a~-}\qu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{ces~}\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{pour~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{Ton~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{im-}\cu i\enotes
\hardlyrics{men-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu j\enotes
\notes\zsong{se~}\cu k\enotes
\barre
\Notes\hsong{gloi-}\ql j\enotes
\Notes\hsong{-}\ql i\enotes
\Notes\hsong{re~!}\qu h\enotes
\notes\uptext{\bf II}\enotes
\notes\hardlyrics{Sei-}\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\zsong{gneur~}\cu i\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{Dieu,~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\qu j\enotes
\hardlyrics{Roi~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{du~}\cu g\enotes
\Notes\hsong{Ciel,~}\qu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{Dieu~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\zsong{le~}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{P\`e-~}\notes\thelyrics\hsong\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{re~}\cu i\enotes
\hardlyrics{tout-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{puis-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{sant~!}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\qup h\enotes
\notes\uptext{\bf I}\enotes
\notes\zsong{Sei-}\cu h\enotes
\mulooseness 2%
\stoppiece
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 The result clearly shows the inequality between note spacings,
some of them forced by lyrics length, some others related to the
value of \verb|\elemskip| choosen by {\tt musixflx} according to the
given value of \keyindex{mulooseness}. Note that \verb|\zsong| still has been
used for lyrics followed by a bar, since their extension across the bar is
usually harmless.

\begin{music}
\small
\overfullrule 3pt
\instrumentnumber{1}
\setstaffs11
%
\generalsignature{-1}\relax % one flat
\generalmeter{\meterfrac{2}{2}}
%
\staffbotmarg=5\Interligne\stafftopmarg=1.5\Interligne
\startpiece
\setsongraise1{2\Interligne}%
\znotes\uptext{\kern -9mm\raise 9pt\hbox{\bigtype
  Majestueux, sans tra\^\i ner \rm(\metron{\hu}{50})}}\enotes
\hardlyrics {\kern-5pt Gloire }\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu c\enotes
\notes\hsong{\`a }\cu c\enotes
\barre
\NOTes\hsong{Dieu~}\hu f\enotes
\notes\hsong{au}\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{plus~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{haut~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{des}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{cieux~}\qup h\enotes
\notes\hsong{et~}\cu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{paix~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\qu i\enotes
\hardlyrics{sur~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{la~}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\Notes\hsong{ter-}\qu f\enotes
\notes\hsong{re~}\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{aux~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics}\cu f\enotes
\hardlyrics{hom- }\notes\hsong{\thelyrics}\qu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{mes~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{qu'il~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu i\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{ai-}\hu g\enotes
\Notes\hsong{me.}\hu f\enotes
\Notes\uptext{\bf II }\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{Nous~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics}\qu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{lou-}\cu g\enotes
\NOtes\hsong{ons,}\hu h\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{nous~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{b\'e-}\cu j\enotes
\notes\hsong{nis-}\cu j\enotes
\NOtes\hsong{sons,}\hu h\enotes
\barre
\Notes\hsong{nous~}\qu h\enotes
\NOtes\hsong{t'a-}\hu g\enotes
\Notes\hsong{do-}\qu f\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{rons,~}\hu f\enotes
\notes\uptext{\bf I}\enotes
\hardlyrics{nous~}\notes\hsong{\thelyrics }\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{glo-}\cu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{ri-}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\NOTEs\hsong{fions,~}\hu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{\kern -4pt nous~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{Te~}\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{ren-}\cu h\enotes
\notes\zsong{dons~}\cu i\enotes
\barre
\NOtes\hsong{gr\^a~-}\qu g\enotes
\notes\hsong{ces~}\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{pour~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{Ton~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{im-}\cu i\enotes
\hardlyrics{men-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu j\enotes
\notes\zsong{se~}\cu k\enotes
\barre
\Notes\hsong{gloi-}\ql j\enotes
\Notes\hsong{-}\ql i\enotes
\Notes\hsong{re~!}\qu h\enotes
\notes\uptext{\bf II}\enotes
\hardlyrics{Sei-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\zsong{gneur~}\cu i\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{Dieu,~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\qu j\enotes
\hardlyrics{Roi~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{du~}\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{Ciel,~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\qu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{Dieu~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\zsong{le~}\cu g\enotes
\barre
\hardlyrics{P\`e-~}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\notes\hsong{re~}\cu i\enotes
\hardlyrics{tout-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu g\enotes
\hardlyrics{puis-}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\cu h\enotes
\hardlyrics{sant~!}\notes\hsong\thelyrics\qup h\enotes
\notes\uptext{\bf I}\enotes
\notes\zsong{Sei-}\cu h\enotes
\mulooseness 2%
\stoppiece
\end{music}


 The complete score of this carol --- with slightly different layout
due to different page size --- is given in example {\tt glorias.tex} and in
{\tt gloriab.tex}, the latter exhibiting not only the song tune but also the
organ accompaniment
(both require {\tt musixsty.tex}).


\section{Abnormal music coding}
 \subsection{Gregorian chant: staffs and clefs} \index{gregorian
music}Gregorian chant is often coded using four line staffs (see sections
\ref{gregorian} and \ref{stafflinenumber}) and using special notes (called
\itxem{neumes}) which are described in section \ref{gregnotes}. But the
gregorian chant also needs special clefs which are in fact the ancestors of
the modern ones. The \itxem{gregorian clefs} can be invoked instead of the
modern ones by:

\keyindex{setaltoclefsymbol}\verb|3\gregorianCclef|

\keyindex{setbassclefsymbol}\verb|3\gregorianFclef|

\noindent will cause the instrument number 3 to exhibit the chosen gregorian
clefs. The standard clefs can be restored for every instrument with
\keyindex{resetclefsymbols}.

It is to be emphasized that, since version T.40 of \musixtex, one should
specify whether one wants to change the bass clef symbol or the alto clef
symbol (also the treble clef symbol, but there is no treble clef in gregorian
chant). The reason is that \musixtex\ (as well as \musictex) selects and
raises differently the F, G and C clefs according to the arguments of the
\keyindex{setclef} command. Therefore, if one had substituted any F clef
symbol while saying \verb|\setclef1{1000}|, then an F clef would duly appear
on the staff, but it would have been set at the position of an alto clef, thus
seriously misleading the musician.

 However, for compatibility with what was previously choosen\footnote{By A.
{\sc Egler}...}, the \keyindex{setclefsymbol} still exists, but it substitutes
the given second argument \ital{to all clef symbols} of that instrument,
regardless of the actual musical meaning of this symbol. \verb|\setclefsymbol|
is therefore discouraged, unless one changes the design of the clef symbol of
an instrument for the whole of the score.

 As an example, the same gregorian scale has been written with a gregorian C
clef on all four lines of the staff:

 \begin{music}
 \parindent 19mm
 \instrumentnumber{4}
 \setname1{1st line} \setname2{2nd line} \setname3{3rd line} \setname4{4th line}
 \setlines1{4}\setlines2{4}\setlines3{4}\setlines4{4}
 \sepbarrules
 \generalmeter{\empty}
 \setclef1{1000} \setclef2{2000} \setclef3{3000} \setclef4{4000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol1\gregorianCclef
 \setaltoclefsymbol2\gregorianCclef
 \setaltoclefsymbol3\gregorianCclef
 \setaltoclefsymbol4\gregorianCclef
\startextract
\Notes\squ{abcdefghi}&\squ{abcdefghi}&\squ{abcdefghi}&\squ{abcdefghi}&\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}

 The coding was:
 \begin{verbatim}
 \instrumentnumber{4}
 \setname1{1st line} \setname2{2nd line} \setname3{3rd line} \setname4{4th line}
 \setlines1{4}\setlines2{4}\setlines3{4}\setlines4{4}
 \sepbarrules
 \generalmeter{\empty}
 \setclef1{1000} \setclef2{2000} \setclef3{3000} \setclef4{4000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol1\gregorianCclef
 \setaltoclefsymbol2\gregorianCclef
 \setaltoclefsymbol3\gregorianCclef
 \setaltoclefsymbol4\gregorianCclef
\startextract
\Notes\squ{abcdefghi}&\squ{abcdefghi}&\squ{abcdefghi}&\squ{abcdefghi}&\enotes
\endextract
 \end{verbatim}


 \subsection{Music score without clefs or with special clefs}

 \subsubsection{Empty clefs}
\index{clefs (empty)}
 Regardless of the number of lines of the staffs, an instrument may
have no clefs, e.g.~for \itxem{percussion music} but also for any weird
purpose. This is done by declaring the following item:

\keyindex{setclefsymbol}~$n$\verb|\empty|

\noindent Normal symbols for these clefs can be restored by:

\keyindex{resetclefsymbols}

 \subsubsection{Octave clefs}\index{octave clefs}
 
 Octave treble clefs and octave bass clefs are provided. They can replace the usual
 treble and bass clefs by saying:

 \keyindex{setclefsymbol}~$n$\keyindex{bassoct}

 \keyindex{setclefsymbol}~$n$\keyindex{trebleoct}

 \noindent for upper octaviation, and

 \keyindex{setclefsymbol}~$n$\keyindex{basslowoct}

 \keyindex{setclefsymbol}~$n$\keyindex{treblelowoct}

 \noindent for lower octaviation.

 \begin{music}
 \parindent 19mm
 \instrumentnumber{4}
 \generalmeter{\empty}
 \setclef1\bass \setclef2\bass \setclef3\treble \setclef4\treble
 \setbassclefsymbol1\basslowoct
 \setbassclefsymbol2\bassoct
 \settrebleclefsymbol3\treblelowoct
 \settrebleclefsymbol4\trebleoct
\startextract
\Notes\qu{`abcdefghi}&\qu{`abcdefghi}&\qu{abcdefghi}&\qu{abcdefghi}&\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}

{\noindent\sl REMARKS: \begin{itemize} \item The \keyindex{setclefsymbol},
\keyindex{settrebleclefsymbol}, \keyindex{setaltoclefsymbol} and
\keyindex{setbassclefsymbol} commands only change the symbol posted, not the
altitude of the note head. Thus, if you say \verb|\setclef1\bass| and then
|\setbassclefsymbol1\trebleclef|, your score will be definitely wrong. In the
same way, \keyindex{trebleoct} and similar octave clefs will only change the
symbol, but a note coded {\tt a} wiull have the same vertical position,
regardless of the clef symbol chosen.
 \item Changing clef symbols also affect clef changes within the score, but
this clef changes will be posted by large symbols, not smaller clefs as usual.
Anyway, it can be remarked that clef changes only concern scores with standard
treble, alto and bass clefs... 
\end{itemize}
}

 \subsubsection{Drum clef}
 A special \itxem{drum clef} (two heavy vertical bars) can
replace for the $n$-th intrument any of the standard clefs by saying:

\keyindex{setclefsymbol}~$n$\keyindex{drumclef}\label{sectiondrum}

\noindent However, since the vertical position of the clef depends on the
previously stated clef, it is not wise to replace any clef symbol with the
drum clef, but to have the instrument previously configured with the default
violin clef, i.e. \verb|{0000}|.

 It is to be emphasised that these features are specific to one
instrument --- not one staff of a several staff instrument --- so that some
weird score for \ital{monks}, \ital{drum} and \ital{electronic keyboard}
such as

\begin{music}
\parindent 19mm
\instrumentnumber{3}
\setname1{keyboard} \setname2{drum} \setname3{monks}
\setlines2{1}
\setlines3{4}
\setinterinstrument1{-2\Interligne}% less vertical space above
\setinterinstrument2{-2\Interligne}% and below the percussion
\sepbarrules
\setsign1{-1} % one flat at keyboard
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}
\setmeter3\empty
\setclef3\alto
\setclef1\bass
\setstaffs12 % 2 staffs at keyboard
\setclefsymbol3\gregorianCclef % gregorian C clef at instrument 3
\setclefsymbol2\drumclef       % cancel G clef at instrument 2
\startextract
\Notes\hu F|\zh c\hu h&\dnq4&\squ{acd}\enotes\bar
\NOtes\qu I|\zq N\qu d&\qp&\diapunc f\enotes
\NOtes\qu J|\zq a\qu e&\ynq4&\diapunc e\enotes\bar
\notes\hu G|\zh b\hu d&\dnq4&\zsqu d\rsqu g\squ{hgh}\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
\noindent could be coded as follows, regardless this is relevant (see remark
in \ref{gregoriancappella}, p. \pageref{gregoriancappella}):
\begin{verbatim}
\parindent 19mm
\instrumentnumber{3}
\setname1{keyboard} \setname2{drum} \setname3{monks}
\setlines2{1}
\setlines3{4}
\setinterinstrument1{-2\Interligne}% less vertical space above
\setinterinstrument2{-2\Interligne}% and below the percussion
\sepbarrules
\setsign1{-1} % one flat at keyboard
\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}
\setmeter3{\empty}
\setclef3{\alto}
\setclef1{\bass}
\setstaffs1{2} % 2 staffs at keyboard
\setclefsymbol3{\gregorianCclef} % gregorian C clef at instrument 3
\setclefsymbol2{\drumclef}       % cancel G clef at instrument 2
\startextract
\Notes\hu F|\zh c\hu h&\dnq4&\squ{acd}\enotes\bar
\NOtes\qu I|\zq N\qu d&\qp&\diapunc f\enotes
\NOtes\qu J|\zq a\qu e&\ynq4&\diapunc f\enotes\bar
\notes\hu G|\zh b\hu d&\dnq4&\zsqu d\rsqu g\squ{hgh}\enotes
\end{verbatim}
In the same way, a possible violin score with \itxem{harmonic notes} (see
\ref{othernotes}) could be:\label{abnormalscores}

\begin{music}
\parindent0pt
\generalsignature{-2}
\generalmeter\allabreve
\startextract
\NOTes\dzq o\zh d\hu h\enotes
\Notes\ibu0k0\zq g\yqb0k\qb0j\zq e\yqb0i\tbu0\qb0j\enotes
\bar
\NOTes\dzq g\hu k\enotes
\NOTes\hpause\enotes
\bar
\NOTes\dzq o\zh d\hl h\enotes
\Notes\ibl0e0\zq g\yqb0k\qb0j\zq e\yqb0i\tbl0\qb0j\enotes
\bar
\NOTes\dzq g\hu k\enotes
\NOTes\hpause\enotes
\endextract
\end{music}
It was coded as follows:
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\generalsignature{-2}
\generalmeter\allabreve
\startextract
\NOTes\dzq o\zh d\hu h\enotes
\Notes\ibu0k0\zq g\yqb0k\qb0j\zq e\yqb0i\tbu0\qb0j\enotes
\bar
\NOTes\dzq g\hu k\enotes
\NOTes\hpause\enotes
\bar
\NOTes\dzq o\zh d\hl h\enotes
\Notes\ibl0e0\zq g\yqb0k\qb0j\zq e\yqb0i\tbl0\qb0j\enotes
\bar
\NOTes\dzq g\hu k\enotes
\NOTes\hpause\enotes
\endextract
\end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \subsection{Usual percussion music}
Besides single percussion scores usually
written using one-line staffs, percussion music involving several instruments
is often writen on five-line staffs with a \ital{drum clef}, where the
instruments are distinguished by the type of the note heads and the apparent
pitch of the note on the staff. We give an example --- kindly provided by
Agusti {\sc Mart\'in Domingo}:

\medskip
\begin{music}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\setclefsymbol1\drumclef
\parindent0pt\startpiece
\leftrepeat
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\xqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\kzq d\zql f\zq j\xqb0n\tbu0\xqb0n\enotes
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\xqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\kzq d\zql f\zq j\xqb0n\tbu0\xqb0n\enotes
\bar
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\kqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\xzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\kqb0n\enotes
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\kqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\xzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\kqb0n\enotes
\bar
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\oxqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\oxzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\oxqb0n\enotes
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\oxqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\oxzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\oxqb0n\enotes
\setrightrepeat\endpiece
\end{music}
 Its coding was:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
\begin{music}
\instrumentnumber{1}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac44}
\setclefsymbol1\drumclef
\parindent0pt\startpiece
\leftrepeat
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\xqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\kzq d\zql f\zq j\xqb0n\tbu0\xqb0n\enotes
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\xqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\kzq d\zql f\zq j\xqb0n\tbu0\xqb0n\enotes
\bar
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\kqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\xzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\kqb0n\enotes
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\kqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\xzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\kqb0n\enotes
\bar
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\oxqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\oxzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\oxqb0n\enotes
\Notes\zql f\rlap\soupir\ibu0m0\oxqb0{nn}\enotes
\Notes\oxzq d\zql f\zq j\kqb0n\tbu0\oxqb0n\enotes
\setrightrepeat\endpiece
\end{music}
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}
 To use these different note heads, one must
 \begin{itemize}
 \item either include a specific percussion file namely\index{percussion
music} \ttxem{musixper.tex} after the usual \verb|\input musixtex|;
 \item use special macro names to replace the usual elliptic black note head
with other available note heads. Today only the most used note types are
supported.
 \end{itemize}


\section{Writing your own macros: the {\Bslash catcode} problems}
As seen before, the \keyindex{catcodes} of the \| and \verb|&| symbols
are modified by \musixtex, in the range of the actual scores but not
in the whole of the \TeX\ source.
Thus, if you define your own macros to make
your writing easier, you are likely to invoke the \| or \verb|&|
symbols in a part of text where their \keyindex{catcode}s are not correctly set.
\index{"|@{\tt\char'174}}
This may result typically in a diagnostic like:

\verb|! Misplaced alignment tab character &.|

\noindent when you attempt, not to define, but to use your macro using the
\verb|&| symbol to change the instrument. Smart \TeX ers know that the
\keyindex{catcode}s are attached to the characters \ital{when they are input}
and not when they are used; thus you must be sure that \| and \verb|&|
have the correct \musixtex\ \keyindex{catcode} when the macro is defined,
which may well occur outside the actual score.

It is also worth pointing out that the same problem may occur with other
punctuation marks like ``\verb|<|'', ``\verb|>|'', ``\verb|^|,
etc., if their \keyindex{catcode} has been changed by some other set of
macros, like \ttxem{french.sty}.

\section{\LaTeX~and \musixtex}
 \subsection{The {\tt musixtex.sty} style}\label{musixltx}
 As said before, the amount of memory and registers used by \musixtex\ makes
it hardly compatible with \LaTeX. However, Nicolas {\sc
Brouard}\index{Brouard, N.@{\sc Brouard, N.}} succeeded in building a
\ttxem{musixltx.tex} which is now included in the distribution. This is
not recommended to make separate music scores. Its purpose is rather to
provide a means of inserting short musical excerpts in books or articles
written with \LaTeX. Then, the \keyindex{documentstyle} command should
include {\tt musixtex} in the options.

The \LaTeX\ \index{LaTeX@\LaTeX}style file \ttxem{musixtex.sty}
simply \verb|\input|s the following files (in that very order):
\begin{itemize}
 \item \verb|musixtex.tex|
 \item \verb|musixltx.tex|
\end{itemize}
 In case of \verb|TeX capacity exceeded...|, use a ``Bigla\TeX'' (after
checking there is no visible error in the source
code).\index{BigLaTeX@Big\LaTeX}
 \subsection{Wide music in \LaTeX}\label{musixblx}
 Another difficulty appears with \LaTeX: internal \LaTeX\ macros handle the
page size in a way which is not supposed to be changed within a given document.
This means that text horizontal and vertical sizes are somewhat frozen so that
one can hardly insert pieces of music of page size different from the size
specified by the \LaTeX{} \itxem{style}.
Although a \ttxem{musixblx.tex} has been provided, which makes the
\ital{environment} \verb|bigmusic| available.
\zkeyindex{begin\LBR bigmusic\RBR}
The main drawback is an unpredictable behaviour of top and bottom
printouts, especially page numberings.

 If the whole of a document has wide pages, it can be handled with the
\ttxem{a4wide} style option, or any derivate of it.
 \subsection{The {\Bslash catcode} problems}
 The \verb|musixltx.tex| file merely overrides the \keyindex{catcode}s of the
\| and \verb|&| symbols which are modified by \musixtex. To have access to
these symbols when coding music, you should enclose the scores or excerpts
within \verb|\begin{music}| and \verb|\end{music}|. But there is also another
possibility, i.e.\ to say \keyindex{nextinstrument} instead of
\verb|&|\index{\&} and \keyindex{nextstaff} instead of \|.
\index{"|@{\tt\char'174}}

 Another problem comes from the {\tt\ixem{french.sty}} written by Bernard
{\sc Gaulle}\index{Gaulle, B.@{\sc Gaulle, B.}} which is the standard of the
\ixem{GUTenberg} French association. This style changes many
\keyindex{catcode}s which lead \musixtex\ to fail in many cases. Therefore
the \keyindex{catcode}s of all are forced to the adequate value at
\keyindex{startpiece}, \keyindex{startextract} and restored at their original
value at \keyindex{endpiece}, \keyindex{stoppiece} and \keyindex{endextract}.
This means that some facilities like the \itxem{guillemets} or the
\itxem{tabulation} character are inhibited within music scores (possible
problem with sophisticated \itxem{lyrics}) but perfectly available within the
normal text.

 Anyway, in case of emergency, one can invoke \keyindex{catcodesmusic} to
establish the \keyindex{catcode}s at their value fit for music, and
\keyindex{endcatcodesmusic} to reset them at their external value, for example
those chosen by \verb|french.sty|.

\section{Implementation and restrictions}

 The macroinstruction file \musixtex\ contains approximately 4200 lines of
code, that is 98~000 bytes approximately. This requires your score to be
compiled by the most extended versions of \TeX\ (65~000 words of working
memory). It is therefore wise to say \verb|\tracingsstats=2| in
order to have an information about the memory used in each page. In desperate
situations, we recommend using the ``Big\TeX'' processors which,
unfortunately, performed a great deal of disk input/outputs (on PCs with i286
processors) which made them awfully slow. Of course, using i386 or i486 or Pentium
processors, this problem disappears with the specific version of
{\tt emTeX}, namely {\tt tex386}.\index{BigTeX@Big\TeX}\index{emTeX@em\TeX}

In particular, the number of registers it uses and the amount of memory used
by \LaTeX\ macros makes it doubtfully compatible with \LaTeX, unless using
Big\LaTeX.\index{BigLaTeX@Big\LaTeX}

Other precautions are necessary: beware of end-of-line spaces; they corrupt
layout and cause {\tt underfull/overfull hbox} warnings during third pass.
To avoid that, it is recommended
to use \verb|%| at the end of source lines.


%\subsection{ABC2MTeX}
% Generally: yes
%\subsection{MIDI2TeX}
% s.a.a. (I already use a modified one, Thanx to C)
%\subsection{SceX}
% next time

\section{From \musictex~to \musixtex: {\tt musixcpt}}
\label{compatibility}

This file is intended to run `{\bf old}' input files with as less changes
(read \verb|musicdoc| {\bf and} \musixtex's laws~!) as possible. It slows
down the speed and makes it impossible to use some\footnote{This was the will
of one of the authors (A.E.) but we (we=D.T.) are now tending to remove any
incompatibilities of {\tt musixcpt} with plain \musixtex.} of \musixtex\
commands.

 To run \musictex\ examples --- not withstanding restrictions related to
glue and ``hard'' spacings forbidden with
\musixtex\ --- just replace all previous \verb|\input music*| by:

 \verb|\input musixtex|

 \verb|\input musixcpt|

\noindent and, optionally

 \verb|\input musixsty|

\subsection{Compatibility restrictions}

The \ttxem{musixcpt.tex} file holds up
compatibility to \musictex's sources, but there are some restrictions, which
are caused either by missing glue in \musixtex\ --- sometimes ugly, but
generally harmless --- or by some hard spacings such as \verb|\hbox|es
containing lyrics exceeding the \keyindex{noteskip} dimension, and resulting
in ``overfull hbox[es]'' that is, notes and symbols outside the score limits,
with the heavy vertical bar as a standard \TeX\ punishment.

The easiest way to avoid this consists in ending systematically
\ital{all}\footnote{ALL lines, not ``most of them''.} input
lines between \keyindex{startpiece}...\keyindex{stoppiece}\footnote{or
\keyindex{Stoppiece} or \keyindex{endpiece} or \keyindex{Endpiece}.}
with a comment sign\footnote{For \TeX perts: every line
which does not end with a command}, namely a ``\verb|%|''.

\medskip Besides, one might want to have a unique source file to be compiled
with both the \musictex\ format and the \musixtex\ format, and\footnote{This
might be considered as an excessive requirement, but we (D.T.) think it is a
good way of including \musixtex's new facilities...} taking advantage of some
specific possibilities of \musixtex. The leads to a need of testing whether
the source file is compiled with one format or the other. In fact this test is
easy:\zkeyindex{mxversion}

\verb|\ifx\mxversion\undefined|

\ \ \ the specific \musictex\ code

\verb|\else|

\ \ \ the specific \musixtex\ code, taking advantage of new features

\verb|\fi|

\medskip Several examples are now included in \musictex's examples, for
example {\tt pacifiqn.tex}. Of course this would fail if the user
inadvertently decided to define the command {\Bslash mxversion} in his source
text.
 %\check

\subsection{Additional commands in {\tt musixcpt.tex}}

The tentative user looking in given examples might find commands not described
in the \musixtex\ manual (this one). Most frequent are (in case of missing
description, revert to \musictex's manual, namely {\tt musicdoc.tex}, {\tt
musicdoc.dvi}, {\tt musicdoc.ps}, {musicdoc.lj}, etc.):

\begin{itemize}
 \item\keyindex{qh} : same as \verb|\qb|, but was different with \musictex,
since it distinguished notes hanging above (\verb|\qb|) and below (\verb|\qh|)
the beam(s).
 \item\keyindex{debutmorceau} : nearly but not exactly  the same as
\verb|\startpiece|.
 \item\keyindex{suspmorceau} : suspends the score at the end of the line, in
order to permit inserting ordinary \TeX\ commands. Similar to
\keyindex{stoppiece} but performs line counting necessary then using
\musictex's \verb|\autolines| feature.
 \item \keyindex{reprmorceau} is synonym of \verb|\contpiece|.
 \item \keyindex{lreprmorceau} is synonym of \verb|\contpiece|.
 \item \keyindex{preprmorceau} ejects a newpage and performs \verb|\contpiece|.
 \item \keyindex{finmorceau} is synonym of \verb|\Stoppiece|, i.e. with heavy
ending double bar..

 \item\keyindex{barre} : same as \verb|\bar|.
 \item\keyindex{dsoupir} : same as \verb|\ds|.
 \item\keyindex{qsoupir} : same as \verb|\qs|.
 \item\keyindex{demisoupir} : same as \verb|\ds|.
 \item\keyindex{temps} : was glue in \musictex, now equivalent to
\verb|\empty|.
 \item\keyindex{autolines} is fit for scores with
bars of regular length: after \keyindex{startpiece}, you code the
following macro:


\medskip\Bslash autolines $tml$

\medskip\noindent\rm where $t$ is the number of \ital{elementary spacings}
(the length of {\Bslash notes...\Bslash enotes}) in an average bar, $m$ is the
number of bars you wish in a line and $l$ is the number of lines you wish in a
page. This sets some parameters, namely \keyindex{maxbarsinline} and
\keyindex{maxlinesinpage} which are simply used to count the bars (counter is
\keyindex{barsinline}), optionally perform \keyindex{alaligne} or
\keyindex{alapage} (counter is \keyindex{linesinpage}) instead of the normal
\verb|barre| or \verb|bar|. You may freely alter the values of these
parameters, once they have been established by \keyindex{autolines}. Moreover,
you can still force line-breaking of page ejection using {\Bslash alaligne} or
\keyindex{alapage} without problem since these macros actually reset the bar
counters appropriately.

 \end{itemize}

 %\check
% \subsection{Often reported problems}

 %\check
\section{Extension Library}
All following files are invoked with saying \keyindex{input} \ital{filename}
 \subsection{musixadd}
Increases the number of instruments, slurs and beams up to nine.
 \subsection{musixbm}
 Provides 128th notes, either with hooks or with beams, namely the
\keyindex{ibbbbbu},
\keyindex{ibbbbbl},
\keyindex{nbbbbbu},
\keyindex{nbbbbbl},
\keyindex{tbbbbbu},
\keyindex{tbbbbbl},
\keyindex{Ibbbbbu},
\keyindex{Ibbbbbl},
\keyindex{cccccu},
\keyindex{ccccca},
\keyindex{zcccccu},
\keyindex{cccccl} and
\keyindex{zcccccl} commands.
 \subsection{musixbbm}
 Provides 256th notes, only with beams, namely the
\keyindex{ibbbbbbu},
\keyindex{ibbbbbbl},
\keyindex{nbbbbbbu},
\keyindex{nbbbbbbl},
\keyindex{tbbbbbbu},
\keyindex{tbbbbbbl},
\keyindex{Ibbbbbbu} and
\keyindex{Ibbbbbbl} commands.
 \subsection{*musixcho}\label{song}
 These are some macros fit for chorus music. Provides following commands:
\keyindex{biglbrace}, \keyindex{bigrbrace}, \keyindex{braceheight},
\keyindex{Dtx} and \keyindex{Drtx} for double text, \keyindex{Ttx} and
\keyindex{Trtx} for triple text, \keyindex{Qtx} and \keyindex{Qrtx} for
quadruple text.

\keyindex{tx}\verb|{|$text$\verb|}|,
\keyindex{rtx}\verb|{|$text$\verb|}| for text of songs, with text extending
to right instead centered.
 \keyindex{hf}\verb|{|$m$\verb|}| sets  text
continuation rule of width $m$ \verb|\noteskip|.


\begin{music}
\tenrm
\parindent11.5mm
\braceheight5.4\Interligne\relax
%\rightline{Arr.: H.~W.~Eichholz}
\instrumentnumber2
\generalsignature{-2}
\generalmeter{\meterfrac22}
\setclef1\bass
\relativeaccid
\setinterinstrument1{11\Interligne}
\songtop2
\songbottom1
\setname2{\vbox{\hsize\parindent\centerline{Sopran}\centerline{Alt}}}
\setname1{\vbox{\hsize\parindent\centerline{Tenor}\centerline{Bass}}}
\sepbarrules\nobarnumbers
\beforeruleskip-2pt
\startpiece
%% bar 1
\znotes&\rlap{\kernm2em\Qrtx 1.|2.|3.|4.*}\en
\NOTes\sslur ILd1\sslur bNu1\zhl I\hu b%
  &\Qtx\ixhf{Oh}|No|No|There'll*\issluru0f\sslur dad1\zhup f\hl d\en
\Notes\zhl L\hu N&\Qtx ~|more|more|~be*\hl{^c}\en
\NOtes&\tsslur0g\qu g\en
%%% bar 2
\bar
\NOtes\zql I\qu b&\Qrtx\thf freedom,|weepin',|moanin',|singin',*\zqu i\ql d\en
\NOTesp\lpt I\zhl I\hup b&\zhup i\hlp d\en
%%% bar 3
\bar
\nspace
\NOTes\sslur JMd1\sslur bau1\zhl J\hu b%
  &\Qtx\ixhf{oh}|no|no|there'll*\issluru0j\sslur edd1\zhup j\hl{^e}\en
\Notes\zhl M\hu a&\Qtx~|more|more|~be*\hl{=e}\en
\NOtes&\tsslur0k\qu k\en
%%% bar 4
\bar
\NOtes\zql I\qu b&\Qrtx\thf freedom,|weepin',|moanin',|singin',*\zqu j\ql d\en
\NOTesp\lpt I\zhl I\hup b&\zhup i\hlp d\en
%%% bar 5
\bar
\NOTesp\sslur IJd1\sslur bau1\lpt I\zhl I\hup b%
  &\Qtx\ixhf{oh}|no|no|~there'll*\isslurd0f\issluru1j\zhup k\hlp f\en
\NOtes\zql J\qu a&\Qtx~|more|more|~be*\tsslur1f\zqu f\roff{\tsslur0e\ql e}\en
%%% bar 6
\bar
\NOtes\zql K\qu b&\Qrtx\thf freedom,|weepin',|moanin',|singin',*\zqu i\ql f\en
\NOtes\zql J\qu b&\zqu i\ql e\en
\NOtes\zql I\qu b&\rlap{\kernm2\Internote\bigrbrace}\rtx~~~over*\zqu i\ql d\en
\NOtes\zql G\qu b&\zqu k\ql f\en
%%% bar 7
\bar
\nspace
\NOTes\zhl J\hu b\caesura&\tx ~me,*\zhu j\hl{^e}\caesura\en
\Notes\zcl J\cu b&\rtx ~over*\zcu j\cl e\en
\NOtesp\zqlp J\qup b&\zqup k\lpt e\ql e\en
\endpiece
\end{music}

 See {\tt musixdoc.tex} source to get the coding of this long example.

 Note that, since vertion T.89, multiple line texts are vertically justified
 with a \keyindex{ChroirStrut} macro defined as \verb|\vphantom{\^Wgjpqy}| to
eliminate zigzagging lyrics lines.

 %\check
 \subsection{musixdat}
Here is the command \keyindex{today} defined for several languages.
The default is \keyindex{dateUSenglish}, but this can freely be changed at
end of \ttxem{musixdat.tex}.
Also available are \keyindex{dategerman}, \keyindex{dateaustrian},
\keyindex{dateenglish} and \keyindex{datefrench}, which yields:
\begin{quote}\begin{tabular}{ll}\hline
\verb|\dateUSenglish|&\dateUSenglish\today\\
\verb|\dateaustrian|&\dateaustrian\today\\
\verb|\dateenglish|&\dateenglish\today\\
\verb|\datefrench|&\datefrench\today\\
\verb|\dategerman|&\dategerman\today\\\hline
\end{tabular}\end{quote}
 \subsection{*musixdia}\label{diam}
These file is automatically loaded, if you use {\tt musixper.tex}.
Here is the list of notes it provides:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox to 1em{\musixchar37} symbol is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a ``\verb|y|''
(think of ``dyamond''). Available are \keyindex{yqu}, \keyindex{yqup},
\keyindex{yqupp}, \keyindex{yql}, \keyindex{yqlp}, \keyindex{yqlpp},
\keyindex{yzq}, \keyindex{yzqp}, \keyindex{yzqpp}, \keyindex{yqb},
\keyindex{ycu}, \keyindex{yccu}, \keyindex{ycccu}, \keyindex{yccccu},
\keyindex{ycl}, \keyindex{yccl}, \keyindex{ycccl}, \keyindex{yccccl},
\keyindex{ycup}, \keyindex{ycupp}, \keyindex{yclp}, \keyindex{yclpp}. The
symbol without a stem can be obtained by saying \keyindex{ynq} and the
non-spacing variant with \keyindex{zynq}.
 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox to 1em{\musixchar38} symbol is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a ``\verb|d|''
(think of \ital{diamond}). Available are \keyindex{dqu}, \keyindex{dqup},
\keyindex{dqupp}, \keyindex{dql}, \keyindex{dqlp}, \keyindex{dqlpp},
\keyindex{dzq}, \keyindex{dzqp}, \keyindex{dzqpp}, \keyindex{dqb},
\keyindex{dcu}, \keyindex{dccu}, \keyindex{dcccu}, \keyindex{dccccu},
\keyindex{dcl}, \keyindex{dccl}, \keyindex{dcccl}, \keyindex{dccccl},
\keyindex{dcup}, \keyindex{dcupp}, \keyindex{dclp}, \keyindex{dclpp}. The
symbol without a stem can be obtained by saying \keyindex{dnq} and the
non-spacing variant with \keyindex{dznq}.
 \end{itemize}
 %\check
 \subsection{*musixeng}
 This package is made for music typesetters who are allergic to rest names
taken from French, German or Italian\footnote{By the way, note that a
\ital{whole rest} is called \ital{pause} in French, \ital{ganze Pause} in
German, and \ital{pausa} in Italian.}. It does not provide new features, only
new command names.
 \begin{quote}\begin{tabular}{ll}\hline
\ital{original}&\ital{alternative}\\\hline
\keyindex{PAUSe}&\keyindex{Qwr}\\
\keyindex{PAuse}&\keyindex{Dwr}\\
\keyindex{liftpause}&\keyindex{liftwr}\\
\keyindex{pausep}&\keyindex{wrp}\\
\keyindex{pause}&\keyindex{wr}\\
\keyindex{lifthpause}&\keyindex{lifthr}\\
\keyindex{hpausep}&\keyindex{hrp}\\
\keyindex{hpause}&\keyindex{hr}\\
\keyindex{qp}&\keyindex{qr}\\
\keyindex{ds}&\keyindex{er}\\
\keyindex{qs}&\keyindex{eer}\\
\keyindex{hs}&\keyindex{eeer}\\
\keyindex{qqs}&\keyindex{eeeer}\\\hline
\end{tabular}\end{quote}
 \subsection{musixext}

\keyindex{slide}\verb|{|pitch\verb|}{|elements\verb|}{|slope[-8 to 8]\verb|}|~:
  glissando.

\keyindex{raggedstoppiece} :
  provides a ragged last line.
  %\check

 \subsection{musixf{}l{}l}
 \input musixfll
 \ttxem{musixfll.tex} may be used to modify the automatic
generation of \ixem{ledger lines}. Ledger lines --- German Hilfslinien
--- are generated for notes placed above or below normal staff lines. 
Ledger lines normally exceed the note head by a quarter of the width of
the note head. If notes are set very narrowly, the ledger lines of
consecutive notes may meet. In this case a player may misread the
ledger lines as normal lines. Therefore \musixtex{} shortens the
ledger lines if notes are set so narrowly that the ledger lines may
meet. Because \musixtex{} does not know whether consecutive notes need
ledger lines, this automatic shortening may be superfluous. So this
automatism may be switched off and on. After including
\ttxem{musixfll.tex} the automatic shortening of ledger lines is
switched off. Afterwards it may be switched on again using
\keyindex{autoledgerlines} and switched off again using
\keyindex{longledgerlines}. Both macros have global effect.

 The following example shows that narrowly set scales look better with
\keyindex{autoledgerlines}, while single notes requiring ledger lines
look better with \keyindex{longledgerlines}.

\begin{music}
\startextract
\notes\multnoteskip{0.7}\Uptext{autoledgerlines}\autoledgerlines
	\ibbbu0b0\qb0{cba`gfg'a}\tbu0\qb0b%
	\ibbbl0{''b}0\qb0{abcdedc}\tbl0\qb0b%
	\ibbbu0{``b}0\qb0{dad}\tbu0\qb0a%
	\ibbbl0{''b}0\qb0{`g'c`g}\tbl0\qb0{'c}\en
	\bar
\notes\multnoteskip{0.7}\Uptext{longledgerlines}\longledgerlines
	\ibbbu0b0\qb0{cba`gfg'a}\tbu0\qb0b%
	\ibbbl0{''b}0\qb0{abcdedc}\tbl0\qb0b%
	\ibbbu0{``b}0\qb0{dad}\tbu0\qb0a%
	\ibbbl0{''b}0\qb0{`g'c`g}\tbl0\qb0{'c}\en
\endextract
\autoledgerlines
\end{music}

 \subsection{*musixgre}\label{gregnotes}


 Provided that four line staffs (see \ref{stafflinenumber}) are used,
\itxem{gregorian music} is frequently quoted using specific \itxem{neumes},
established in the thirteenth century, and this way of coding has been
commonly used for the coding of liturgical chant in the Catholic Church until
the middle of the twentieth century. Nevertheless, gregorian chant coding is
not really an antique feature, since it has been codified in 1905 with recent
quasi-official updates in the eightties.


{\noindent\sl REMARK:\label{gregoriancappella} strictly writing, including
gregorian chant coding in \musixtex{} is a pure nonsense. Of course, many
people find it interesting to have the possibility of coding gregorian neumes
together with modern music, but having a score with both a gregorian chant and
a choir or instruments is definitely \ital{heretic}. The reason is that
grogorian chant must be sung \ital{a cappella}, without instrument and without
underlying polyphony. As a matter of fact, serious music schools ceased to
teach how to accompany gregorian chant approximately 20 years ago.

 However, there are still some pseudo-gregorian chants in the Catholic
repertoire which deserve organ or orchestra accompaniment: these are latine
speaking gregorian imitations composed in the eighteenth century, such as the
famous \ital{Angel's mass} of the \ital{Messe royale de Du Mont} which were
printed using gregorian neumes by official catholic publishers instead of
using the music denotations fit for renaissance and baroque pieces...}


 Symbols available in \musixtex\ are
mainly those of the 1905 standard, as provided by Beda {\sc
Szukics}\index{Szukics, B.@{\sc Szukics, B.}}:

\subsubsection{The clefs}

\begin{itemize}
 \item The gregorian C clef: \raise 2.5pt\hbox to 1cm{\gregorianCclef\hfil}~=
 \keyindex{gregorianCclef}, normally activated for instrument $n$ with the
command:
 \begin{quote}
 \keyindex{setaltoclefsymbol} $n$ \keyindex{gregorianCclef}
 \end{quote}
 \item The gregorian F clef:  \raise 2.5pt\hbox to 1cm{\gregorianFclef\hfil}~=
\keyindex{gregorianFclef}, normally activated with the
\verb|\setbassclefsymbol| command.
 \end{itemize}

 \subsubsection{The basic elementary symbols}
 \begin{itemize}

 \item Diamond shaped \itxem{punctum} (of different shape compared to the
percussion diamond): \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar1}~ =
\keyindex{diapunc}~$p$~.
 \item Square \itxem{punctum}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar5}~ =
\keyindex{squ}~$p$ or \keyindex{punctum}~$p$~.
 \item Left stemmed \itxem{virga} (not in the 1905 gregorian standard): \raise
2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar6}~ = \keyindex{lsqu}~$p$~.
 \item Right stemmed \itxem{virga}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar7}~ =
\keyindex{rsqu}~$p$ or \keyindex{virga}~$p$~.
 \item \ital{Apostropha}\index{apostropha}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar3}~ =
\keyindex{apostropha}~$p$~.
 \item \ital{Oriscus}\index{oriscus}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar10}~ =
\keyindex{oriscus}~$p$~.

 \item \ital{Quilisma}\index{quilisma}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar125}~ =
\keyindex{quilisma}~$p$~.
 \item \ital{Punctum auctum} (up)\index{punctum auctum}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar9}~ =
\keyindex{punctumauctup}~$p$~.
 \item \ital{Punctum auctum} (down)\index{punctum auctum}: \raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar8}~ =
\keyindex{punctumauctdown}~$p$~.
 \item Diamond shaped \ital{punctum auctum} (down)\index{punctum auctum}:
\raise 2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar2}~ = \keyindex{diapunctumauctdown}~$p$~.
 \item \ital{Punctum deminutum}\index{punctum deminutum}: \raise
2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar4}~ = \keyindex{punctumdeminutum}~$p$~.
 \item \ital{Apostropha aucta}\index{apostropha aucta}: \raise
2.5pt\hbox{\xgregchar11}~ = \keyindex{apostropha aucta}~$p$~.


\end{itemize}
 All non-\ital{liquescens} symbols have a non-spacing variant, which are
\keyindex{zdiapunc}, \keyindex{zsqu}, \keyindex{zlsqu}, \keyindex{zrsqu},
\keyindex{zapostropha} and \keyindex{zoriscus}.

\subsubsection{The plain complex neumes}
Other \itxem{neumes} can be obtained by combining two or more of these
symbols. Since \itxem{neumes} have a special note head width, an additional
shifting macro is provided, namely \keyindex{groff}. It is similar to
\verb|\roff|, but the offset is smaller; to implement also triple symbol neumes,
another shifting macro is provided, namely \keyindex{dgroff} which performs an
offset twice the offset of \verb|\groff|..

 Since most of these symbols depend on relative pitches of their components,
one could not provide all compact combinations as single symbols. Following
compound symbols are:

\begin{description}
 \item[\keyindex{bivirga} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \bivirga ab\enotes
 \notes \bivirga cc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
  This example was coded as:
  \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \bivirga ab\enotes
 \notes \bivirga cc\enotes
 \endextract
  \end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \item[\keyindex{trivirga} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \trivirga abc\enotes
 \Notes \trivirga cca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{bistropha} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \bistropha ab\enotes
 \notes \bistropha cc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{tristropha} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \tristropha abc\enotes
 \Notes \tristropha cca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

  \item[\keyindex{clivis} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \clivis ba\enotes
 \notes \clivis ca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{lclivis} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \lclivis ba\enotes
 \notes \lclivis ca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{podatus} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \podatus ab\enotes
 \notes \podatus ac\enotes
 \notes \podatus cf\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{podatusinitiodebilis} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \podatusinitiodebilis ab\enotes
 \notes \podatusinitiodebilis ac\enotes
 \notes \podatusinitiodebilis cf\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{lpodatus} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \lpodatus ab\enotes
 \notes \lpodatus ce\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{pesquassus} $n$ $p$], for example:
 
 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \pesquassus ab\enotes
 \notes \pesquassus ae\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{quilismapes} $n$ $p$], for example:
 
 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \quilismapes ab\enotes
 \notes \quilismapes ae\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

  \item[\keyindex{torculus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \torculus aba\enotes
 \notes \torculus cfd\enotes
 \notes \torculus afc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

  \item[\keyindex{torculusinitiodebilis} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \torculusinitiodebilis aba\enotes
 \notes \torculusinitiodebilis cfd\enotes
 \notes \torculusinitiodebilis afc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{Porrectus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \Porrectus bab\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bac\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bNd\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bMe\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bLe\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
\noindent coded:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \notes \Porrectus bab\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bac\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bNd\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bMe\enotes
 \notes \Porrectus bLe\enotes
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 \verb|\Porrectus| exists in four different shapes, depending on the
difference between first and second argument. The constraint is that
 $$ n-4 \leq p \leq n-1 $$ otherwise a diagnostic occurs. Note also that
\keyindex{bporrectus} provides the first curved part of the \verb|porrectus|
command, if you need it... It has two arguments, the starting pitch, the lower
pitch.

 \item[\keyindex{Porrectusflexus} $n$ $p$ $q$ $r$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bacN\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bNdb\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bMeb\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bLea\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
\noindent coded:
 \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bacN\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bNdb\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bMeb\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusflexus  bLea\enotes
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}

 
 \item[\keyindex{climacus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \climacus cbN\enotes
 \Notes \climacus cba\enotes
 \Notes \climacus dbN\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{climacusresupinus} $n$ $p$ $q$ $r$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \climacusresupinus cbNa\enotes
 \Notes \climacusresupinus cbab\enotes
 \Notes \climacusresupinus dbNb\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{lclimacus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \lclimacus cbN\enotes
 \notes \lclimacus cfd\enotes
 \notes \lclimacus afc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}


 \item[\keyindex{scandicus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \scandicus abe\enotes
 \notes \scandicus ceg\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{salicus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \salicus abe\enotes
 \Notes \salicus ceg\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{salicusflexus} $n$ $p$ $q$ $r$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \salicusflexus abec\enotes
 \Notes \salicusflexus cegd\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{trigonus} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example\footnote{The second
example is in principle irrelevant, but it shows the possibilities, in case
of.}:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \trigonus aaN\enotes
 \Notes \trigonus cef\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

\end{description}

\subsubsection{The liquescens complex neumes}\index{liquescens neumes}
\begin{description}
  \item[\keyindex{clivisauctup} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \clivisauctup ba\enotes
 \notes \clivisauctup ca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
  \item[\keyindex{clivisauctdown} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \clivisauctdown ba\enotes
 \notes \clivisauctdown ca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
 \item[\keyindex{podatusauctup} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \podatusauctup ab\enotes
 \notes \podatusauctup ac\enotes
 \notes \podatusauctup cf\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
 \item[\keyindex{podatusauctdown} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \podatusauctdown ab\enotes
 \notes \podatusauctdown ac\enotes
 \notes \podatusauctdown cf\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{pesquassusauctdown} $n$ $p$], for example:
 
 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \pesquassusauctdown ab\enotes
 \notes \pesquassusauctdown ae\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{quilismapesauctdown} $n$ $p$], for example:
 
 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \quilismapesauctdown ab\enotes
 \notes \quilismapesauctdown ae\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
 
  \item[\keyindex{torculusauctdown} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \torculusauctdown aba\enotes
 \notes \torculusauctdown cfd\enotes
 \notes \torculusauctdown afc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{Porrectusauctdown} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \Porrectusauctdown bac\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusauctdown bNd\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusauctdown bMe\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusauctdown bLe\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{climacusauctdown} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \climacusauctdown cbN\enotes
 \Notes \climacusauctdown caM\enotes
 \Notes \climacusauctdown aNM\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{scandicusauctdown} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \scandicusauctdown abe\enotes
 \notes \scandicusauctdown ceg\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{salicusauctdown} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \salicusauctdown abe\enotes
 \Notes \salicusauctdown ceg\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

  \item[\keyindex{clivisdeminut} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \clivisdeminut ba\enotes
 \notes \clivisdeminut ca\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{podatusdeminut} $n$ $p$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \podatusdeminut ab\enotes
 \notes \podatusdeminut ac\enotes
 \notes \podatusdeminut cf\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

  \item[\keyindex{torculusdeminut} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \torculusdeminut aba\enotes
 \notes \torculusdeminut cfd\enotes
 \notes \torculusdeminut afc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

  \item[\keyindex{torculusdebilis} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \torculusdebilis aba\enotes
 \notes \torculusdebilis cfd\enotes
 \notes \torculusdebilis afc\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{Porrectusdeminut} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \Porrectusdeminut bac\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusdeminut bNd\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusdeminut bMe\enotes
 \notes \Porrectusdeminut bLe\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{climacusdeminut} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \Notes \climacusdeminut cbN\enotes
 \Notes \climacusdeminut caM\enotes
 \Notes \climacusdeminut aML\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}

 \item[\keyindex{scandicusdeminut} $n$ $p$ $q$], for example:

 \begin{music}
 \elemskip 10pt
 \instrumentnumber 1
 \setsize1{\Largevalue}
 \setstaffs 1 1
 \setlines 1 4
 \setclef 1{3000}
 \setaltoclefsymbol 1 \gregorianCclef
 \startextract
 \notes \scandicusdeminut abe\enotes
 \notes \scandicusdeminut ceg\enotes
 \endextract
 \end{music}
\end{description}

 %\check
 \subsection{musixgui} \ttxem{musixgui.tex} provides some macros for
typesetting \itxem{guitar tablatures}. Most times they are used above modern
music. To give an example:

\begin{music}
\hsize130mm
\tenrm
\parindent0pt
\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
\generalsignature1
\startbarno0
\def\txh{-6.5}
\def\tx#1*{\zchar\txh{\lrlap{\kern3\Internote#1}}}
\def\rtx#1*{\zchar\txh{\kern-3\Internote#1}}
\stafftopmarg10\Interligne
\raiseguitar{20}
\nostartrule
\startpiece
\addspace{.5\afterruleskip}%
\NOtes\tx We*\qa d\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar G{}o-----\gbarre3\gdot25\gdot35\gdot44\tx wish*\qa g\en
\Notes\tx you*\ca g\en
\Notes\tx a*\ca h\en
\Notes\zchar\txh{merry}\ca g\en
\Notes\ca f\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar C5o-----\gbarre4\gdot26\gdot36\gdot45\rtx christmas,*\qa e\en
\NOtes\qa e\en
\NOtes\guitar {e/H}5o-----\gbarre3\gdot35\gdot45\gdot54\tx we*\qa e\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar {A$\!^7$}5o-----\gbarre1\gdot23\gdot42\tx wish*\qa h\en
\Notes\tx you*\ca h\en
\Notes\tx a*\ca i\en
\Notes\zchar\txh{merry}\ca h\en
\Notes\ca g\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar D{}xxo---\gdot42\gdot53\gdot62\rtx christmas,*\qa f\en
\NOtes\qa d\en
\zbar
\NOtes\guitar{D/c}{}xo----\gdot23\gdot42\gdot53\gdot62\tx we*\qa d\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar{B$^7$}{}xo----\gdot22\gdot31\gdot42\gdot62\tx wish*\qa i\en
\Notes\tx you*\ca i\en
\Notes\tx a*\ca j\en
\Notes\tx ~mer-*\ca i\en
\Notes\tx ry*\ca h\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar e{}xxo---\gdot32\tx ~christ-*\qa g\en
\NOtes\tx mas*\qa e\en
\Notes\guitar {G/d}{}xxo---\gdot63\tx and*\ca d\en
\Notes\tx a*\ca d\en
\bar
\NOtes\guitar{C$^6$}{}xo----\gdot23\gdot32\gdot42\gdot51\tx ~~hap~-*\qa e\en
\NOtes\tx py*\qa h\en
\NOtes\guitar{D$^7$}{}xo---x\gdot25\gdot34\gdot45\gdot45\gdot53\tx new*\qa f\en
\bar
\NOTes\guitar G{}o-----\gbarre3\gdot25\gdot35\gdot44\tx ~year.*\ha g\en
\setdoublebar\endpiece
\end{music}

\medskip
\keyindex{guitar} sets the grid, the chord name, the relative barre and play
indicators. As example the first chord in upper example was coded as:

\verb|\guitar G{}o-----\gbarre3\gdot25\gdot35\gdot44|

where the first argument is put above the grid to indicate the chord name, the
second is empty (relative barre) and the other six indicates if the string
is played with either \verb|x|, \verb|o| or \verb|-|. The dots are set with
\keyindex{gdot}~$sb$ where the $s$ is the string and $b$ is the barre. The
rule is set with \keyindex{gbarre}~$b$ where $b$ indicates the barre.

The whole chord may be vertically shifted with
\keyindex{raiseguitar}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|, where $n$ is a number
in units of \keyindex{internote}. It might be useful to reserve additional
space above the chord by advancing \keyindex{stafftopmarg} to
something like \verb|stafftopmarg=10\Interligne|.

If you need the chords more often, it might be useful to define your own
macros, e.g.~saying:

\verb|\def\Dmajor{\guitar D{}x-----\gdot42\gdot53\gdot62}%|
 \subsection{*musixlit}\label{litu}\label{otherbars}
 Provides a way of coding intermediate between gregorian and baroque/romantic,
still used\footnote{Was written by A. {\sc Egler}. To my knowledge (D. T.),
liturgical works are either written with modern music quotation, or using the
gregorian \itxem{neumes} which have been normalized in 1905.} for liturgical
works!

\makeatletter
\catcodesmusic
%\def\vnotes#1\elemskip{\noteskip#1\@l@mskip \multnoteskip\scal@noteskip
%  \not@s}

%\def\not@s{\def|{\nextstaff}\def&{\nextinstrument}\normaltranspose\transpose
%  \check@nopen\notes@open\@ne
%  \kern\n@skip\advance\x@skip\n@skip \locx@skip\x@skip
%  \n@skip\noteskip \noinstrum@nt\z@ \begininstrument}

%\def\en{\@ndstaff\notes@open\z@
%  \ifx\@ne\V@sw \widthtyp@\z@\t@rmskip \let\V@sw\empty \fi}

\def\double#1{\roffset{1.2}{\advancefalse#1}#1}
\makeatother

 % Don't know if this example correct ??? But looks nice...
\begin{music}
\parindent0pt
\instrumentnumber{2}
\interstaff{11}
\generalsignature2
\setclefsymbol2\oldGclef
\setstaffs1{2}
\setclef1\bass
\setinterinstrument1{-\Interligne}
\startpiece
\shortbarrules
\addspace\afterruleskip
\hardlyrics{Il nous a sign\'es de son
  }\notes\zw d\wh K|\zw f\wh h&\rtx\thelyrics*\Hpause h1\en
\qspace\qspace
\NOTes\zhl N\hu d|\zhl g\hu i&\tx sang*\double{\cnql i}\en
\bar
\hardlyrics{Et nous avons \'e-
  }\notes\zw d\wh K|\zw f\wh h&\rtx\thelyrics~-*\Hpause h1\en
\qspace\qspace
\NOTes\zhl M\hu c|\zhl f\hu h&\rtx t\'e*\double{\cnql i}\en
\NOtes\zql L\qu e|\zql b\qu g&\tx ~pro-*\cnqu g\en
\NOtes\zql b\qu d|\zql d\qu f&\tx ~t\'e-*\cnqu f\en
\NOTes\zhl a\hu c|\zhl e\hu h&\tx g\'es.*\double{\cnqu h}\en
\bar
\NOtes\zql M\qu d|\zql d\qu h&\tx ~~Al~-*\cnqu h\en
\NOtes\zql K\qu a|\zql f\qu k&\tx ~~le~-*\cnql k\en
\NOTes\zhl H\hu a|\zhl e\hu j&\tx ~~lu~-*\double{\cnql j}\en
\bar
\NOTEs\zhl K\hu a|\zhl f\hu k&\tx ~~ia !*\cnhl k\en
\sepbarrules
\endpiece

\startpiece
\interbarrules
\addspace\afterruleskip
\hardlyrics{Il nous a sign\'es de son
  }\notes\zw d\wh K|\zw f\wh h&\rtx \thelyrics*\Hlonga h1\en
\qspace\qspace
\NOTes\zhl N\hu d|\zhl g\hu i&\tx sang*\chl i\en
\bar
\hardlyrics{Et nous avons \'e
  }\notes\zw d\wh K|\zw f\wh h&\rtx \thelyrics~-*\Hlonga h1\en
\qspace\qspace
\NOTes\zhl M\hu c|\zhl f\hu h&\rtx t\'e*\chl i\en
\NOtes\zql L\qu e|\zql b\qu g&\tx ~pro-*\cqu g\en
\NOtes\zql b\qu d|\zql d\qu f&\tx ~t\'e-*\cqu f\en
\NOTes\zhl a\hu c|\zhl e\hu h&\tx g\'es.*\chu h\en
\bar
\NOtes\zql M\qu d|\zql d\qu h&\tx ~~Al~-*\cqu h\en
\NOtes\zql K\qu a|\zql f\qu k&\tx ~~le~-*\cql k\en
\NOTes\zhl H\hu a|\zhl e\hu j&\tx ~~lu~-*\chl j\en
\bar
\NOTEs\zbreve K\breve a|\zbreve f\breve k&\tx ~~ia !*\zbreve k\en
\sepbarrules
\endpiece
\end{music}

 This package provides:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item\keyindex{oldGclef} which replaces the ordinary G clef with an old one,
using (for instrument 2 as an example):
 \verb|\settrebleclefsymbol2\oldGclef|

 \item\keyindex{cqu} $p$ provides a square headed quarter note with stem up at
pitch $p$.

 \item\keyindex{cql} $p$ provides a square headed quarter note with stem down at
pitch $p$.

 \item\keyindex{chu} $p$ provides a square headed half note with stem up at
pitch $p$.

 \item\keyindex{chl} $p$ provides a square headed half note with stem down at
pitch $p$.

 \item\keyindex{cnqu} $p$ and \keyindex{cnql} $p$ provide a stemless square headed
quarter note at pitch $p$.

 \item\keyindex{cnhu} $p$ and \keyindex{cnhl} $p$ provide a stemless square
headed half note at pitch $p$.

 \item\keyindex{Hpause} $p$ $n$ provides an arbitrary length pause at pitch
$p$ and of length $n$ \keyindex{noteskip}. However, in the first of the above
example, this feature has been used to denote an arbitrary length note rather
than a rest!

 \item\keyindex{Hlonga} $p$ $n$ provides an arbitrary length note at pitch
$p$ and of length $n$ \keyindex{noteskip}.
This feature has been used to denote an arbitrary length note in the second of
the above examples.

 \item\keyindex{shortbarrules} has been used to provide bar rules shorter than
the staff vertical width.

 \item\keyindex{interbarrules} has been used to provide bars between the
staffs, rather that over them. This is an arbitrary question of taste...
 \end{itemize}



 \subsection{musixmad} \ttxem{musixmad.tex} increases the number of
instruments, slurs and beams up to twelve.
 \subsection{musixper}\label{perc}

  Provides specific percussion symbols, especially \keyindex{drumclef}
(used in section \ref{sectiondrum}). These definitions cause problems
since drum and percussion notation is not standardized.
So it might be clever to specifiy the names of instruments for each
used symbol.


 %\check
 \begin{itemize}
 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar113}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|dc|'' (think of \ital{DiagonalCross} for e.g. closed \itxem{hihat}).
Available are
\keyindex{dcqu},
\keyindex{dcql},
\keyindex{dcqb},
\keyindex{dczq},
\keyindex{dccu},
\keyindex{dcccu},
\keyindex{dccl} and
\keyindex{dcccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar112}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|dh|''
(think of \ital{DiagonalcrossHalfcircle} for e.g. half open \itxem{hihat}).
Available are
\keyindex{dhqu},
\keyindex{dhql},
\keyindex{dhqb},
\keyindex{dhzq},
\keyindex{dhcu},
\keyindex{dhccu},
\keyindex{dhcl} and
\keyindex{dhccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar111}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|do|''
(think of \ital{DiagonalCross and O for circle} for open \itxem{hihat}).
Available are
\keyindex{doqu},
\keyindex{doql},
\keyindex{doqb},
\keyindex{dozq},
\keyindex{docu},
\keyindex{doccu},
\keyindex{docl} and
\keyindex{doccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar114}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|x|'' (e.g. for spoken text of songs).
Available are
\keyindex{xqu},
\keyindex{xql},
\keyindex{xqb},
\keyindex{xzq},
\keyindex{xcu},
\keyindex{xccu},
\keyindex{xcl} and
\keyindex{xccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar115}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|ox|'' (.!.).
Available are
\keyindex{oxqu},
\keyindex{oxql},
\keyindex{oxqb},
\keyindex{oxzq},
\keyindex{oxcu},
\keyindex{oxccu},
\keyindex{oxcl} and
\keyindex{oxccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar118}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|ro|'' (think of \ital{RhOmbus} for e.g.~shaker).
Available are
\keyindex{roqu},
\keyindex{roql},
\keyindex{roqb},
\keyindex{rozq},
\keyindex{rocu},
\keyindex{roccu},
\keyindex{rocl} and
\keyindex{roccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox{\musixchar116}~{}~symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc. macros preceeded with a
``\verb|tg|'' (think of \ital{TrianGle} for e.g.~rattle).
Available are
\keyindex{tgqu},
\keyindex{tgql},
\keyindex{tgqb},
\keyindex{tgzq},
\keyindex{tgcu},
\keyindex{tgccu},
\keyindex{tgcl} and
\keyindex{tgccl}.

 \item The \raise.5ex\hbox to 1em{\musixchar117\hfil} symbol which is obtained using the
\verb|\qu|, \verb|\qb|, \verb|\cu|, etc.~macros preceeded with a
``\verb|k|'' (for bongos).
Available are
\keyindex{kqu},
\keyindex{kql},
\keyindex{kqb},
\keyindex{kzq},
\keyindex{kcu},
\keyindex{kccu},
\keyindex{kcl} and
\keyindex{kccl}.
 \end{itemize}
 \subsection{musixpoi}
 Adds pointed compact definitions of notes.
Available are
\keyindex{ccup},
\keyindex{zccup},
\keyindex{cclp},
\keyindex{zcclp},
\keyindex{ccupp},
\keyindex{zccupp},
\keyindex{cclpp},
\keyindex{zcclpp},
\keyindex{cccup},
\keyindex{zcccup},
\keyindex{ccclp},
\keyindex{zccclp},
\keyindex{cccupp},
\keyindex{zcccupp},
\keyindex{ccclpp},
\keyindex{zccclpp},
\keyindex{ccccup},
\keyindex{zccccup},
\keyindex{cccclp},
\keyindex{zcccclp},
\keyindex{ccccupp},
\keyindex{zccccupp},
\keyindex{cccclpp} and
\keyindex{zcccclpp}.

 %\check
 \subsection{musixstr}\label{musixstr}\index{musixstr@{\tt musixstr.tex}}
 This file provides a set of indications for \itxem{string instruments} (e.g.
\ixem{violin}) execution, provided by Werner {\sc Icking}\index{Icking,
W.@{\sc Icking, W.}}.


 {\input musixstr
 The symbols described below should be posted at the wanted place using
 \verb|\zcharnote|$p$\verb|{|$<command-name>$\verb|}|.

\begin{quote}\begin{description}

 \item[\hbox to 1em{\AB}~: \keyindex{AB} or  \keyindex{downbow}] down-bow


 \item[\hbox to 1em{\AUF}~: \keyindex{AUF} or \keyindex{upbow}] up-bow


 \item[\hbox to 1em{\SP}~: \keyindex{SP}] at the top of bow

 \item[\hbox to 1em{\FR}~: \keyindex{FR}] at the nut of bow

 \item[\GB\ or \Gb~: \keyindex{GB} or  \keyindex{Gb}] whole bow

 \item[\UH\ or \Uh~: \keyindex{UH} or  \keyindex{Uh}] lower half of bow

 \item[\OH\ or \Oh~: \keyindex{OH} or  \keyindex{Oh}] upper half of bow

 \item[\MI\ or \Mi~: \keyindex{MI} or \keyindex{Mi}] middle of bow

 \item[\UD\ or \Ud~: \keyindex{UD} or  \keyindex{Ud}] lower third of bow

 \item[\OD\ or \Od~: \keyindex{OD} or  \keyindex{Od}] upper third of bow

 \item[\Pizz~: \keyindex{Pizz}] left hand pizzicato or trill

 \end{description}\end{quote}
 }
 %\check
 \subsection{musixsty}\index{musixsty@{\tt musixsty.tex}}

 This file is made for non \TeX perts and/or lazy score typesetters. Although
related to \musixtex, it has little to see with music, but it helps writing
all surrounding texts, like \itxem{titles}, \itxem{author names}, historical
comments, etc. It provides
 \begin{itemize}
 \item a set of font definitions of common use, such as \verb|\tenrm|,
\verb|\eightrm|, etc.,
 \item a reasonable setting of \keyindex{hsize}, \keyindex{vsize},
\keyindex{hoffset}, \keyindex{voffset} dimensions in order to have a good
layout fit for European A4 paper\footnote{People addicted to \itxem{legal} or
other paper sizes should correct it for their own purpose.}
 \item a set of text size commands:

 \begin{description}
  \item[\keyindex{eightpoint}] which sets the usual \keyindex{rm},
\keyindex{bf}, \keyindex{sl}, \keyindex{it} commands to 8 point font size;
  \item[\keyindex{tenpoint}] which sets the usual \keyindex{rm},
\keyindex{bf}, \keyindex{sl}, \keyindex{it} commands to 10 point font size;
  \item[\keyindex{twlpoint}] to get 12 point font size;
  \item[\keyindex{frtpoint}] to get 14.4 point font size;
  \item[\keyindex{svtpoint}] to get 17.28 point font size;
  \item[\keyindex{twtypoint}] to get 20.74 point font size;
  \item[\keyindex{twfvpoint}] to get 24.88 point font size;
 \end{description}
 \item a set of commands to make easy piece titles:
  \begin{itemize} \item \keyindex{author} or
\keyindex{fullauthor} to be put at the right of the first page, below the
title of the piece; the calling sequence is, for example:

  \verb|     \author{Daniel TAUPIN\\organiste \`a Gif-sur-Yvette}|

  \noindent where the \verb|\\| makes the author's name displayed on two or
several lines.


  \item \keyindex{shortauthor} to be put at the bottom of each page,
  \item \keyindex{fulltitle} which is the big main title of the piece,
  \item \keyindex{subtitle} is displayed below the main title of the piece,
  \item \keyindex{shorttitle} or \keyindex{title}
  which is the title repeated at the bottom of each page,
  \item \keyindex{othermention} which is displayed on the left of the page, in
front of the author's name (it may contain several \verb|\\| to display it on
several lines,
  \item \keyindex{maketitle}  which displays all the previous stuff.
  \end{itemize}

 \item  Some additional commands to make \itxem{footnotes}.
 These commands are
  \begin{itemize}
   \item The normal Plain-\TeX\ \keyindex{footnote} command which has two
arguments --- not only one as in \LaTeX\index{LaTeX@\protect\LaTeX} --- namely
the label of the footnote, i.e. any sequence of characters and not only
figures, and the text of the footnote.

\begin{important} the \verb|\footnote| command does not work inside
boxes\footnote{This is not a \TeX-bug, this is a feature!}, therefore this
command must not be issued within music. But another alternate feature is
provided (see below).
 \end{important}

 \item The \keyindex{Footnote} command, which counts the footnotes and uses a
number as the label of the foot note (equivalent to \LaTeX's \verb|\footnote|
command). The same restriction applies concerning footnotes within the music
coding.

 \item The \keyindex{vfootnote} command, taken from the Plain-\TeX, which
makes the footnote itself at the bottom of the current page, but does not put
the footnote label at the place it is referred in the main text.

 Thus, if a footnote is needed whose reference lies inside the music itself,
the music typesetter must perform it in two steps:
 \begin{enumerate}
  \item quote the reference inside the music, using \verb|zcharnote| for
example,
  \item post the footnote itself, using \verb|\vfootnote| outside the music,
either before \keyindex{startpiece} (or \verb|\debutmorceau| with {\tt
musixcpt.tex})  or between \keyindex{stoppiece} and
\keyindex{piececont} or equivalent commands.
 \end{enumerate}

  \end{itemize}

 \end{itemize}

 Note that \verb|musixsty| should not be used with \LaTeX.
 \subsection{musixtri}\index{musixtri@{\tt musixtri.tex}}
Provides triple pointed note symbols.
Available are:
\keyindex{lpppt},
\keyindex{whppp},
\keyindex{zwppp},
\keyindex{huppp},
\keyindex{hlppp},
\keyindex{zhppp},
\keyindex{zhuppp},
\keyindex{zhlppp},
\keyindex{quppp},
\keyindex{qlppp},
\keyindex{zquppp},
\keyindex{zqlppp},
\keyindex{zqppp},
\keyindex{cuppp},
\keyindex{zcuppp},
\keyindex{clppp},
\keyindex{zclppp},
\keyindex{qbppp} and
\keyindex{zqbppp}.

\section{Often reported problems and discussion faxilities}

\subsection{Newsgroups}\index{newsgroups} No specific newsgroup exist
concerning \mutex, \musictex{} or \musixtex; nevertheless W. Icking saw
articles on this topic in  {\tt comp.text.tex} as well as in {\tt
de.comp.text.tex}.

\subsection{Mailing list} A mailing-list does exist which was formerly
dedicated to \mutex, and now to \musictex{} and mostly to \musixtex.
You can subscribe to it by
sending an e-mail to  {\tt mutex-request@gmd.de}
with the message line\index{mailing list}

{\tt subscribe}

\subsection{FAQs}\index{FAQ}

{\tt gmd.de}, too, has a FAQ which is presently out-of-date and quite unusable
since it displays many questions and comments without giving the answer.
However, it will be probably enhanced in a near future. This
FAQ can be accessed using {\tt
ftp}:

{\tt ftp://ftp.gmd.de/music/mutex/faq}

\noindent and the archive of the mailing list may be accessed also by {\tt
ftp}:

{\tt ftp://ftp.gmd.de/music/mutex/archive}

\noindent or:

{\tt http://www.gmd.de/Mail/}

 {\tt ftp.gmd.de} also contains a lot of stuff concerning music and
typesetting music, which can be accessed by WWW at:

{\tt http://www.gmd.de/Misc/Music/}



\chapter{Installation}\label{installation}

\section{*Getting the stuff}

As seen before, all the files are available at \itxem{anonymous ftp}
\verb|hprib.lps.u-psud.fr| (193.55.39.152) in the directory

 {\tt /pub/musixtex}

 The {\tt *.mf} source files are in

 {\tt /pub/musixtex/mf}

\noindent and the {\tt *.tfm} files are in 

 {\tt /pub/musixtex/tfm}

\noindent Besides, this manual is in

 {\tt /pub/musixtex/musixdoc.ps}

 Another directory, namely {\tt /pub/music\_zips} normally contains {\tt
musixtex.zip} which contains all the distribution for PC (\ixem{MS-DOS})
computers. This is only for {\tt ftp}-ing convenience since all source files
are directly available in the general directory and subdirectories. In
addition a set of examples (i.e. the files whose name does not begin with
``\verb|musix|'') is packed into \ttxem{musixexa.zip} and this manual is also in
\ttxem{musixdoc\_ps.zip}  (the PostScript version) and
\ttxem{musixdoc\_lj.zip} (the PCL version for Laserjets).
Finally the PK files of specific fonts are provided in \ttxem{musixpk.zip},
\ttxem{musixpk3.zip} (300 and 360 dpi) and  \ttxem{musixpk6.zip} (600 dpi);
getting these files is useless if you are able to \MF{} the files whose {\tt
*.mf} are provided in the main package.

{\sl\noindent CAUTION: the zipped files are provided in the PC line coding,
i.e. with {\tt <cr><lf>} at line ends, rather than single {\tt <lf>} as in the
\unix{} coding. This means that \unix{} users must carefully unzip these files
using the ``{\tt-a}'' (our ``{\tt-aa}'' options of {\tt unzip} to get correct
coding of the source files. Other wise they would find a lot of ``{\tt\^{}M}'' in
their files, which may cause further troubles.}\index{PC end of line
coding}\index{\^{}M}


 Besides, /unix{} users can also --- when in directory {\tt /pub} --- ask for:

 {\tt get musixtex.tar}\quad or

 {\tt get musixtex.tar.Z}\quad or

 {\tt get musixtex.tar.gz}\quad and even

 {\tt get musixtex.zip}

  Then, the {\tt hprib.lps.u-psud.fr} server will perform required collection
and/or compression ``on-the-fly''. Note that in that case the source files
will be in the \unix{} coding rather than PC coding of end of lines. Usually,
this is harmless for PC editors and \TeX{} motors, but who knows...
 

\ital{Fonts}\index{fonts} are provided in {\tt musixtex.zip} as {\tt *.mf}
files but also as {\tt *.tfm} and {\tt*.pk} files for 300~dpi printers or
previewers. Other values of the \ixem{dpi} parameter are also provided in
\verb|musixpk*.zip|.

Needed fonts are {\tt musix20}, {\tt musix16}, {\tt musix13}, {\tt musix11},
{\tt musix24}, {\tt musix29}, {\tt musixspx}\footnote{Inside this file are two
types of piano brackets available. The default you can see printing this doc,
the other you can see printing {\tt musicdoc}. If you prefer the other, which
are designed by Stanislav Kneifl, follow the instruction inside {\tt
musixsps.mf}},\index{Kneifl, S.@{\sc Kneifl, S.}}
 {\tt xslhu20}, {\tt xslhu16}, {\tt xslhu24}, {\tt xslhu29},
{\tt xslhd20}, {\tt xslhd16}, {\tt xslhd24}, {\tt xslhd29},
{\tt xslu20}, {\tt xslu16}, {\tt xslu24}, {\tt xslu29},
{\tt xsld20}, {\tt xsld16}, {\tt xsld24}, {\tt xsld29},
{\tt xslz20} and {\tt xslhz20}.

\section{Installing the fonts}
\ital{All} files with the extension {\tt .tfm}\footnote{\TeX\ font metric,
needed directly from binary for \TeX ing the examples or the doc.} must
be copied in that directory, in which the other {\tt .tfm}'s are.

If you get the error message:

{\tt! Font ... not loadable: Metric (TFM) file not found.}

\index{Metric (TFM) not found}\noindent this means you have not succeeded to
install the {\tt .tfm}'s in the right directory. This is not a \musixtex\
error, but a local \TeX\ implementation error/misunderstanding. Then read or
re-read your \TeX\ installation doc, put the {\tt tfm}'s at the very right
place and start again.

The {\tt .tfm} only contains the width, height and depth of every character of
a font and is the only needed font-file for \TeX ing. For previewing and/or
printing you need the pixel fonts. On most systems they are packed and have
the extension \verb|.pk|(but perhaps you need the \verb|.gf|-files or
\verb|.300|-files or other: Ask your local \TeX-wizard\footnote{I have read a
mail from somebody, who has said, that he is able --- because he is a
professional --- to write an \verb|install| for installation of packages like
\musixtex. Really? Do it.}!) Most needed and spreaded are fonts for
\verb|dvi|-driver with resolution of 300dpi. Using em\TeX{} associated drivers
the \verb|.pk|-fonts have to be copied in \verb|...\pixel.lj\300dpi\| as a
default, and in general in a directory specified by the environment variable
{\tt DVIDRVFONTS}\footnote{Look at {\tt dvidrv.doc} for more information.}. For
other resolution refer your local manual or \TeX-wizard.

\section{Building a format}\label{formatbuild}

Introducing these files in a \itxem{format} (with \ixem{INITEX}) is a mean of
saving computer time and memory. Besides, if you include {\tt musixcpt.tex} in
your format, you will have a format compatible with \musictex\ and ---
provided you made the symmetrical format for \musictex\ --- you can compile
exactly the same source files with both \musictex\ and \musixtex, which is a
good means of finding whether some strange behaviour is specific to one
implementation of the other, or whether you made some general
mistake\footnote{Not all authors have the same opinion :-). But I was told,
that my opinion doesn't count, so forget it -- A.E.}...

However, although having a \musixtex{} format saves much time, it can also
lead to time wasting weird things in case of updates~: if you update your
source of {\tt musixtex.tex} but not the format {\tt musixtex.fmt}, then
running the command {\tt musixtex} will invoke the old unmodified format...

\subsection{Starting from nil}
\begin{enumerate}
 \item Build up a file called \verb|musixtex.ini| with following content:\\
\begin{verbatim}
\input plain % or dcplain or eplain or see later a safer way of doing
\input musixtex
% here can you add your most needed files from extension lib
% musixcpt at very last !
\end{verbatim}
\verb|\def\fmtname{musixtex}\def\fmtversion{|{\tt\mxversion}\verb|}|
\verb|\dump|
 \item \verb|initex musixtex.ini|\footnote{depends on your implementation}.
 \item \verb|tex &musixtex| \ital{jobname}\footnote{depends on your
implementation}.
\end{enumerate}
\vfill

\subsection{Starting from your usual plain format}
\begin{enumerate}
 \item First, try to find --- on your favourite system --- whether \verb|tex|
is an executable routine, or a \verb|tex.bat| command in MS-DOS or a
\ital{shell} procedure under \unix.
 \item If \verb|tex| is a command try to find the ``{\tt initex}'' local
command: usually it is either \verb|initex| or \verb|tex -i|.
 \item Try to find the name of the ``plain \TeX'' format (usually posted
when \TeX ing anything).
 \item Then, \ital{mutatis mutandis}, assuming the ``{\tt initex}'' command
has the name \verb|initex| and the ``plain \TeX'' format is \verb|plain|, run
the shell command:

 \medskip
 \verb|initex  \&plain musixtex.ins|

 \medskip\noindent which will produce a format file {\tt musixtex.fmt} which
you shall put in the same directory  as the others formats (hoping you have
the access rights...). Note --- in \unix{} systems --- the backslash before
the \verb|&| which tells the system to consider this character as a member of
the command, not a batch execution indication. Once this is done, you can
\musixtex\ any score you have written using a command such as:

 \medskip
 \verb|tex \&musixtex my-score.tex|

 \medskip\noindent that is, specifying your new format {\tt musixtex.fmt}
instead of the usual {\tt plain.fmt}.

 For \ixem{MS-DOS}/{\tt emTeX} users the format building command is:

 \verb|tex386 -i &plain musixtex.ins|

 \noindent (you can change \verb|plain| into \verb|dc-plain| or any other
plain-like format you have) then:

 \verb|copy musixtex.fmt \emtex\btexfmts\*.*|

 \noindent and the {\tt musixtex.bat} command can be

% It makes no sense to state -mt20000, perhaps this is useful for MusicTeX,
% (it uses hyphenation to break a line) but not for MusiXTeX (it uses musixflx)
\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
if exist %1.tex goto tex
goto end

:tex
if exist %1.mx1 del %1.mx1
if exist %1.mx2 del %1.mx2
tex386 -mt20000 &musixtex %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9

if errorlevel 2 goto end
musixflx %1

if errorlevel 1 goto end
tex386 -mt20000 &musixtex %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9

:end
 \end{verbatim}\end{quote}
\end{enumerate}

\begin{flushright}\it
Don't expect a perfect package or miracles.\\
There will be enough unexpected miracles.\\[\smallskipamount]
{\sc Eberhard Mattes}
\end{flushright}

\chapter{Examples}
 Due to compatibility problems with \LaTeX\ (used to produce this notice)
large examples must be \TeX -ed separately, i.e.\ using plain \TeX{} and not
\LaTeX. Therefore, the \musixtex\ future user is suggested to produce some of
the following examples and to look carefully at the way some special features
have been coded.

 When producing this examples, care should be taken about the fact
that several given files are supposed to be included (by means of
\keyindex{input}) in other files. Thus the only good files to be directly
\TeX-ed are those which begin with \verb|\input musixtex| or
 \verb|% \input musixtex|. This latter command is often commented out so that
the examples can be run either using a \musixtex\ format including {\tt
musixcpt.tex} and {\tt musixsty.tex} --- namely the format generated by {\tt
musixtex.ins} --- or using a \musictex\ format including {\tt musictrp.tex},
{\tt musicvbm.tex} and {\tt musicsty.tex} --- namely the format generated by
{\tt musixtex.ins}.

In addition, it must be noted that most DVI previewers and laser printers have
their origin at one inch below and one inch right of the right upper corner
of the paper, while the musical examples have their upper left significant
corner only at one centimeter right and below the left top of the paper.
Therefore, special parameters have to be given to the DVI transcription
programs unless special \keyindex{hoffset} and \keyindex{voffset} \TeX\
commands are introduced within the source \TeX\ text.

\section{Clean \musixtex\ examples}

\begin{itemize}
 \item{\tt avemaria.tex} to get the ``M\'editation'' (alias ``Ave Maria'') by
Charles {\sc Gounod} for organ and violin or song in clean \musixtex-input.
\index{Gounod, C.@{\sc Gounod, C.}}
 \item{\tt traeumer.tex} to get the famous ``Tr\"aumerei'' by
Robert {\sc Schumann} for piano, in genuine \musixtex-input but with some
additions to perform ascending \itxem{crescendos}.
\index{Schumann, R.@{\sc Schumann, R.}}
 \item{\tt parnasum.tex} to get the first page of ``Doctor gradus ad
Parnassum'' by Claude {\sc Debussy} for piano.\index{Debussy,
C.@{\sc Debussy, C.}}
 \item{\tt glorias.tex} to get a local melody for the French version of
\ital{Gloria in excelsis Deo}, showing use of lyrics commands. {\tt
gloriab.tex} is the same, with organ accompaniment.
 \item Other clean \musixtex\ examples seem to be no more compatible with
the present version, but they should be updated in a near future.
\end{itemize}

These examples are packed (zipped) in the {\ttxem{musixexa.zip}} file of the
\musixtex\ distribution.

\section{Nearly compatible \musictex\ examples}

These are examples using not only {\tt musixtex} but also {\tt musixcpt} and
{\tt musixsty}, which means their coding is easily understandable for
\musictex{} previous users. However, they cannot be run as is with \musictex,
since a few specific commands have been included, either for spacing, or for
oblique slurs. They are given in {\tt musixexa.zip}, for example:

 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\tt gymnoman}~: an imitation of Erik {\sc Satie}'s
\ital{Gymnop\'edies}\index{Satie, E.@{\sc Satie, E.}},
 \item {\tt canticor.tex}/{\tt canticox.tex}~:
a famous tune by Georg Friedrich {\sc Haendel}\index{Haendel, G.F.@{\sc
Haendel, G.F.}},
 \item {\tt ilfaitda.tex}/{\tt ilfaitdx.tex}~: a famous choral by J.-S.
{\sc Bach}\index{Bach, J.S.@{\sc Bach, J.S.}} adapted with French lyrics for
French churches,
 \item {\tt widor\_20.tex}~: the famous toccata for organ by Charles-Marie {\sc
Widor}\index{Widor, C.M.@{\sc Widor, C.M.}} in 10 pages (more compact than
commercial editions, and easier to play if nobody can turn the pages), and
{\tt widor\_16.tex} which is the same in 16~pt size, i.e. more compact.
 \item{\tt souveni*.tex}~: a nice French tune of the fifties, by Oreste {\sc
Rossi} and Fernand {\sc Capitani} with several transpositions.
 \item {\tt marcello.tex}~: the adagio of Benedetto {\sc
Marcello}\index{Marcello, B.@{\sc Marcello, B.}}'s oboe concerto, transcribed
for organ.
 \item {\tt hymnepas.tex}~: a modern Eastern canticle by A. {\sc Gouzes} and
{\sc Palestrina}, showing heavy use of \keyindex{hardlyrics} for choral
music.\index{Gouzes, A.@{\sc Gouzes, A.}}

 \end{itemize}

\section{Compatible \musictex\ examples}

They are all the examples provided in the \musictex\ distribution. To run them
the easiest way is to have both a {\tt musictex} and a {\tt musixtex} format as
described in \ref{formatbuild}. Otherwise, insert

 \verb|\input musixtex|

 \verb|\input musixcpt|

 \verb|\input musixsty|

 \noindent at the beginning of each example, and \TeX\ it.

 \section{Looking at examples before installing \musixtex}

 Most of the above examples (and some others) are posted, ready to print, as
PostScript files in:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item {\tt ftp://hprib.lps.u-psud.fr/pub/music\_scores.zip/*/*/*.zip} (zipped
PostScript 300dpi files)
 \item {\tt ftp://hprib.lps.u-psud.fr/pub/music\_scores.gz/*/*/*.ps.gz} (gzipped
PostScript 300dpi files)
 \end{itemize}

 Printing them on any PostScript printer (needs A4 paper) is a good means of
getting an overview of \musixtex's capabilities.


\printindex

\clearpage
{\parindent0pt
\hoffset-15.4mm
\voffset-42mm
\hsize190mm
\vsize285mm
\parskip0pt plus 2pt
% not fine, not clean, but works
% !!! don't look at this !!!
%>>>
\makeatletter
\textheight\vsize
\@colht\vsize
\@colroom\vsize
\makeatother
%<<<
\let\MYTEMP\addcontentsline
\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{}
\chapter{}
\let\addcontentsline\MYTEMP
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
  \protect\numberline\thechapter{Summary of denotations}}
\vglue-20mm
\centerline{\bigfont Pitches}
\medskip
\tentt
\def\bs{\tentt\char92}
\setclef1\bass
\afterruleskip2pt
\startpiece
%
% Pitches
%
\addspace\afterruleskip
\notes\wh{`ABCDEFG}\wh{!ABCDEFG}\wh{HIJKLMNabcde}\off{-26\noteskip}%
  \zchar{14}{\llap`A}\sk
  \zchar{14}{\llap`B}\sk
  \zchar{14}{\llap`C}\sk
  \zchar{14}{\llap`D}\sk
  \zchar{14}{\llap`E}\sk
  \zchar{14}{\llap`F}\sk
  \zchar{14}{\llap`G}\sk
  \zchar{14}A\sk
  \zchar{14}B\sk
  \zchar{14}C\sk
  \zchar{14}D\sk
  \zchar{14}E\sk
  \zchar{14}F\sk
  \zchar{14}G\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'A}\zchar{14}H\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'B}\zchar{14}I\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'C}\zchar{14}J\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'D}\zchar{14}K\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'E}\zchar{14}L\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'F}\zchar{14}M\sk
  \zchar{-5}{\llap'G}\zchar{14}N\sk
  \zchar{14}a\sk
  \zchar{14}b\sk
  \zchar{14}c\sk
  \zchar{14}d\sk
  \zchar{14}e\sk\en
\stoppiece\vskip-3\Interligne\setclef1\treble\contpiece
\notes\wh{abcdefg}\wh{hijklmno}\wh{pqrstuvwxyz}\off{-26\noteskip}%
  \zchar{-8}a\sk
  \zchar{-8}b\sk
  \zchar{-8}c\sk
  \zchar{-8}d\sk
  \zchar{-8}e\sk
  \zchar{-8}f\sk
  \zchar{-8}g\sk
  \zchar{-8}h\zchar{-4}{\llap'a}\sk
  \zchar{-8}i\zchar{-4}{\llap'b}\sk
  \zchar{-8}j\zchar{-4}{\llap'c}\sk
  \zchar{-8}k\zchar{-4}{\llap'd}\sk
  \zchar{-8}l\zchar{-4}{\llap'e}\sk
  \zchar{-8}m\zchar{-4}{\llap'f}\sk
  \zchar{-8}n\zchar{-4}{\llap'g}\sk
  \zchar{-8}o\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}a}\sk
  \zchar{-8}p\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}b}\sk
  \zchar{-8}q\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}c}\sk
  \zchar{-8}r\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}d}\sk
  \zchar{-8}s\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}e}\sk
  \zchar{-8}t\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}f}\sk
  \zchar{-8}u\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'}g}\sk
  \zchar{-8}v\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'\kern-2pt'}a}\sk
  \zchar{-8}w\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'\kern-2pt'}b}\sk
  \zchar{-8}x\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'\kern-2pt'}c}\sk
  \zchar{-8}y\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'\kern-2pt'}d}\sk
  \zchar{-8}z\zchar{-4}{\llap{'\kern-2pt'\kern-2pt'}e}\sk\en
\stoppiece
\medskip
\centerline{\bigfont Notes, Accidentals, Accents, Clefs and Rests}
\medskip
%
% Notes& Accidentals
%
\contpiece
\Notes
  \zchar{-4}{Accidentals:}%
  \zchar9{\bs maxima}\maxima i\relax
  \zchar{12}{\bs longa}\longa i%
  \zchar9{\bs breve}\breve i%
  \zchar{12}{\bs wq}\wq i%
  \zchar{12}{\bs wqq}\wqq i%
  \zchar{12}{\bs wh}\wh i%
  \zchar{12}{\bs hu}\zchar{-4}>\hu{>f}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs hl}\loff{\zchar{-4}{\bs cdsh}}\cdsh l\hl l%
  \zchar{12}{\bs qu}\zchar{-4}\^\qu{^f}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs ql}\loff{\zchar{-4}{\bs csh}}\csh l\ql l%
  \zchar{12}{\bs cu}\zchar{-4}=\cu{=f}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs cl}\loff{\zchar{-4}{\bs cna}}\cna l\cl l%
  \zchar{12}{\bs ccu}\zchar{-4}\_\ccu{_f}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs ccl}\loff{\zchar{-4}{\bs cfl}}\cfl l\ccl l%
  \zchar{12}{\bs cccu}\zchar{-4}<\cccu{<f}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs cccl}\loff{\zchar{-4}{\bs cdfl}}\cdfl l\cccl l%
\multnoteskip{1.2}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs ccccu}\ccccu f%
  \zchar{12}{\bs ccccl}\ccccl l%
\multnoteskip{.8}%
  \zchar{12}{\bs grcu}\grcu f%
  \zchar{12}{\bs grcl}\grcl l\en
\stoppiece
%
% various note heads
%
\contpiece
\Notes
\multnoteskip{1.1}%
  \zchar{10}{\bs dqu$^{123}$}%
    \zchar{-3}{\eightrm 1 musixdia.tex~~2 musixper.tex~~3 musixgre.tex%
                        ~~4 musixlit.tex~~5 musixext.tex}\dqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs yqu$^{123}$}\yqu g%
\multnoteskip{.9}%
  \zchar{10}{\bs dcqu$^2$}\dcqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs dhqu$^2$}\dhqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs doqu$^2$}\doqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs xqu$^2$}\xqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs oxqu$^2$}\oxqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs roqu$^2$}\roqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs tgqu$^2$}\tgqu f%
  \zchar{10}{\bs kqu$^2$}\kqu f%
  \zchar{10}{\bs squ$^3$}\squ g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs lsqu$^3$}\lsqu j%
  \zchar{10}{\bs rsqu$^3$}\rsqu k%
  \zchar{10}{\bs cqu$^4$}\cqu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs cql$^4$}\cql k%
  \zchar{10}{\bs chu$^4$}\chu g%
  \zchar{10}{\bs chl$^4$}\chl k\en
%
% Pointed Notes and Accents
%
\stoppiece
\medskip
\contpiece
\Notes
  \zchar{-5}{\eightrm Accent on beam with prefix {\tt b} and beam reference
number instead of the pitch}%
  \zchar{13}{\bs lpz}\lpz f\qu f%
  \zchar{13}{\bs upz}\upz l\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs lsf}\lsf f\qu f%
  \zchar{13}{\bs usf}\usf l\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs lst}\lst f\qu f%
  \zchar{13}{\bs ust}\ust l\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs lppz}\lppz f\qu f%
  \zchar{13}{\bs uppz}\uppz l\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs lsfz}\lsfz f\qu f%
  \zchar{13}{\bs usfz}\usfz l\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs lpzst}\lpzst f\qu f%
  \zchar{13}{\bs upzst}\upzst l\ql l%
  \zchar{16}{\bs downbow}\zchar9\downbow\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs upbow}\zchar9\upbow\ql l%
  \zchar{16}{\bs flageolett}\flageolett l\ql l%
  \zchar{13}{\bs whp}\whp i%
  \zchar{13}{\bs qupp}\qupp h\en
\stoppiece
\medskip
%
% clefs
%
\setclefsymbol1\empty \nostartrule\contpiece
\NOtes
  \zchar{13}{\bs trebleclef}\zchar0\trebleclef\sk
  \zchar9{\bs altoclef}\zchar0\altoclef\sk
  \zchar{13}{\bs bassclef}\zchar0\bassclef\sk
  \zchar9{\bs smalltrebleclef}\zchar0\smalltrebleclef\sk
  \zchar{13}{\bs smallaltoclef}\zchar0\smallaltoclef\sk
  \zchar9{\bs smallbassclef}\zchar0\smallbassclef\sk
  \zchar{13}{\bs drumclef$^2$}\zchar0\drumclef\sk
  \zchar9{\bs gregorianCclef$^3$}\zchar0\gregorianCclef\sk
  \zchar{13}{\bs gregorianFclef$^3$}\zchar0\gregorianFclef\sk
  \zchar9{\bs oldGclef$^4$}\zchar0\oldGclef\sk\en
\zstoppiece\smallskip
%
% Rests
%
\resetclefsymbols\startrule\contpiece
\NOtes
\multnoteskip{.5}%
  \zchar{13}{\bs qqs}\qqs
  \zchar{13}{\bs hs}\hs
  \zchar{13}{\bs qs}\qs
  \zchar{13}{\bs ds}\ds
  \zchar{13}{\bs qp}\qp
\multnoteskip2%
  \zchar{13}{\bs hpause}\hpause
  \zchar{13}{\bs hpausep}\hpausep
  \zchar{9}{\bs lifthpause}\roff{\lifthpause5}\sk
  \zchar{13}{\bs pause}\pause
  \zchar{13}{\bs pausep}\pausep
  \zchar{9}{\bs liftpause}\roff{\liftpause4}\sk
  \zchar{13}{\bs PAuse}\PAuse
  \zchar{13}{\bs PAUSe}\PAUSe
  \zchar{13}{\bs Hpause$^4$}\Hpause i{.8}\sk\en
\stoppiece\vskip-2\Interligne
%
\centerline{\bigfont Other Symbols}
\medskip
%
% more Symbols
%
\contpiece
\NOtes
  \zchar{14}{\bs Trille}\zchar{-4}{\bs allabreve}\Trille n1%
    \zchar0\allabreve\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs trille}\zchar{-4}{\bs meterC}\trille n1\zchar0\meterC\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs shake}\zchar{-4}{\bs reverseC}\shake n\zchar0\reverseC\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs Shake}\zchar{-4}{\bs reverseallabreve}\Shake n%
    \zchar0\reverseallabreve\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs mordent}\mordent n\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs Mordent}\Mordent n\zchar{-4}{\bs meterplus}%
    \zchar0{\meterfrac{3\meterplus2\meterplus3}8}\sk
\multnoteskip{.66}%
  \zchar{14}{\bs turn}\turn n\sk
\multnoteskip{1.25}%
  \zchar{14}{\bs backturn}\backturn n\zchar{-4}{\bs duevolte}\duevolte\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs Shakel}\Shakel n\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs Shakesw}\Shakesw n\zchar{-4}{\bs l[r]par}%
    \lpar f\rpar f{\stemlength4\qu f}%
  \zchar{14}{\bs Shakene}\Shakene n\sk
  \zchar{14}{\bs Shakenw}\Shakenw n\sk\en
\stoppiece
\medskip
%
% again
%
\contpiece
\NOtes\zchar9{\bs metron}\zchar{13}{\metron\qu{99}}\sk\en
\setvoltabox1\bar
\NOtes\loffset2{\zchar{17}{\bs setvoltabox}}\en
\setvolta2\setendvolta\rightrepeat
\NOtes\loff{\zchar{17}{\bs setvolta}}\en
\doublebar
\notes\zchar{17}{\kern-\afterruleskip\bs coda}\coda n\en\bar
\notes\zchar{17}{\kern-\afterruleskip\bs Coda}\Coda n\en
\NOtes
  \zchar{17}{\bs segno}\segno n\sk
  \zchar{17}{\kern-2\afterruleskip\bs Segno}\Segno\hsk
  \zchar{17}{\bs caesura}\sk\caesura
  \zchar{17}{\bs cbreath}\cbreath\sk
\multnoteskip{.66}%
  \zchar{17}{\bs PED}\PED\sk
  \zchar{17}{\bs sPED}\sPED\sk
  \zchar{17}{\bs DEP}\DEP\sk
  \zchar{17}{\bs sDEP}\sDEP\sk\en
\stoppiece
\medskip
%
% and again ...
%
\contpiece
\Notes
  \zchar{17}{\bs fermataup}\fermataup l%
    \zchar{-8}{\bs fermatadown}\fermatadown f{\stemlength3\ql i}%
  \zchar{13}{\bs Fermataup}\Fermataup l%
    \zchar{-4}{\kern8pt\bs Fermatadown}\Fermatadown f\wh i%
  \loff{\zchar{17}{\bs arpeggio d5}}\arpeggio d5\sk
\multnoteskip{.66}%
  \loff{\zchar{13}{\bs bracket}}\bracket e{10}\zq n\ql e\en
\notes\stemlength3%
  \zchar{17}{\bs uptrio}\uptrio{11}16\ql l\ql n\bsk\bsk
  \zchar{-8}{\bs downtrio}\downtrio{-5}17\qu c\qu e\en
\Notes
  \zchar{17}{\bs octfinup}\octfinup n{.8}%
    \zchar{-4}{\bs octfindown}\octfindown K{.8}\sk\hsk
  \zchar{17}{\bs slide$^5$}%
    \slide i58\slide i57\slide i56\slide i55\slide i54%
    \slide i53\slide i52\slide i51\slide i5{-1}%
    \slide i5{-2}\slide i5{-3}\slide i5{-4}\slide i5{-5}%
    \slide i5{-6}\slide i5{-7}\slide i5{-8}\sk\en
\leftrepeat
\Notes
  \loffset2{\zchar{-4}{\bs leftrepeat}}%
  \boxitsep=2pt\zchar{17}{\bs boxit A}\zchar9{\boxit A}\en
\leftrightrepeat
\Notes
  \loffset2{\zchar{-8}{\bs leftrightrepeat}}%
  \zchar{17}{\bs circleit B}\uptext{\circleit B}\en
\rightrepeat
\NOtes
  \loffset2{\zchar{-4}{\bs rightrepeat}}\en
\endpiece\eject}%
\endmuflex
\end{document}